IBM 5000 User Manual

Netfinity 5000 Server  
Hardware Information and Procedures  
Tables  
1. Maximum Allowable Drive Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
2. Automatically Assigned SCSI IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
3. Switch Settings for Microprocessor Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
4. Serial Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
5. Parallel Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
6. Video Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
7. Keyboard and Auxiliary-Device Port Connectors Pin-Number Assignments 87  
8. The 68-Pin SCSI Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments . . . . . . . . 89  
9. USB Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
10. Ethernet Connector Pin-Number Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11. Netfinity 5000 Server Operating Specifications  
12. Server Identification Numbers  
13. Internal and External Drives and Devices  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
14. Configuration/Setup Program Defaults and Changes . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
15. RAM Default Settings and Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
16. Expansion Slot Configuration Information  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
17. System Board Switch Block SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
18. Switch Settings for Microprocessor Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
19. Backplane Option Jumper Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
20. SCSI IDs for Hot-Swap Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
iii  
Contents  
Safety Information Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Lithium Battery Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Laser Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
x
About This Book  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi  
How This Book is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi  
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii  
Notices Used in This Book  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Features at a Glance  
What Your IBM Netfinity 5000 Server Offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability Features  
Controls and Indicators  
1
3
4
6
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Expansion Bays  
Chapter 2. Arranging Your Workspace  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Arranging Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Configuration Overview  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
The Configuration/Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
Configuring the Ethernet Controller  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Failover for Redundant Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Using the SCSISelect Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Chapter 4. Installing Options  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Electrical Safety  
Handling Static-Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Preparing to Install Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Working with Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Working with Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Installing Microprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Installing or Replacing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Connecting External Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Adding Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Completing the Installation  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Updating the Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Serial Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Management Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Parallel Port Connector  
Video Port Connector  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Keyboard and Mouse Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
SCSI Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Universal Serial Bus Ports  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
v
Ethernet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Removing the Rack Model from a Rack Enclosure  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Diagnostic Test Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Diagnostic Tools Overview  
Power-on Self Test (POST) Messages  
Power-on Self-Test (POST) Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Diagnostic Messages  
SCSI Messages  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
Identifying Problems Using Status LEDs  
Recovering BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Checking the System for Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Replacing the Battery  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Record the Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Installed Device Records  
System Board Illustration  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
System Board Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Changing Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
SCSI Jumpers  
Power Cords  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Glossary  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
vi Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Safety Information Statements  
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.  
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.  
Před instalací tohoto produktu si přečtěte příručku bezpečnostních instrukcí.  
Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.  
Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.  
Avant d'installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.  
Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.  
Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza  
Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.  
Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.  
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.  
Pred inštaláciou tohto zariadenia si pečítaje Bezpečnostné predpisy.  
Antes de instalar este producto lea la información de seguridad.  
Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
vii  
1
DANGER  
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or disconnect any  
cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration  
of this product during an electrical storm.  
To avoid shock hazard:  
– The power cord must be connected to a properly wired and  
earthed receptacle.  
– Any equipment to which this product will be attached must  
also be connected to properly wired receptacles.  
When possible, use one hand to connect or disconnect signal  
cables to prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces  
with different electrical potentials.  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communications  
cables is hazardous. To avoid shock hazard, connect and  
disconnect cables as described following when installing,  
moving, or opening covers of this product or attached devices.  
To Connect  
To Disconnect  
1. Turn Everything OFF.  
1. Turn Everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to receptacles.  
4. Attach power cord(s) to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cord(s) from  
outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from  
receptacles.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
NOTE: In the UK, by law, the telephone  
cable must be connected after the power  
cord.  
NOTE: In the UK, the power cord must be  
disconnected after the telephone cable.  
viii Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Lithium Battery Notice  
2
CAUTION:  
When replacing the battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an  
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your  
system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with  
the same module type made by the same manufacturer. The battery  
contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or  
disposed of.  
Do not:  
– Throw or immerse into water  
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
– Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Safety Information Statements ix  
Laser Compliance Statement  
Laser Compliance Statement  
Some IBM server models are equipped from the factory with a CD-ROM drive.  
CD-ROM drives are also sold separately as options. The CD-ROM drive is a laser  
product. The CD-ROM drive is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements  
of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal Regulations  
(DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products. Elsewhere, the drive is  
certified to conform to the requirements of the International Electrotechnical  
Commission (IEC) 825 and CENELEC EN 60 825 for Class 1 laser products.  
3
CAUTION:  
When a CD-ROM drive is installed, note the following.  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
Removing the covers of the CD-ROM drive could result in exposure to  
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the  
CD-ROM drive. Do not remove the CD-ROM drive covers.  
4
DANGER  
Some CD-ROM drives contain an embedded Class 3A or Class  
3B laser diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not  
view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct  
exposure to the beam.  
x
Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Notices Used in This Book  
About This Book  
This book provides instructions on how to set up and configure your Netfinity 5000  
server and how to install and remove options. This book also provides information  
to help you solve many simple problems that might occur. If you have not yet set  
up your server, refer to the “Express Setup and Installation” section of this Server  
Library for information on unpacking the server, attaching cables, and installing the  
operating system.  
How This Book is Organized  
Chapter 1, “Introducing Your Netfinity 5000,” provides a general introduction to  
using your server.  
Chapter 2, “Arranging Your Workspace,” contains some planning considerations  
and instructions for arranging your workspace.  
Chapter 3, “Configuring Your Server,” describes how to use the  
Configuration/Setup Utility program to configure your server. This chapter also  
provides instructions for using various utility programs.  
Chapter 4, “Installing Options,” contains instructions for installing and removing  
options, such as memory, adapters, and internal drives. Instructions for connecting  
external options are also included in this chapter.  
Chapter 5, “Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure,” describes how to install the  
server in a server rack enclosure.  
Chapter 6, “Solving Problems,” includes an overview of the diagnostic tools,  
instructions for testing the server, lists of error messages, and troubleshooting  
charts. This chapter also contains information about checking the server for  
damage and resolving configuration conflicts.  
Chapter 7, “Server Records and Specifications,” provides a section to record and  
update important information about your server, including serial numbers, key  
number, and device records. In addition to server records, this chapter contains  
the server specifications, such as: dimensions, system board layout, and switch  
locations and settings.  
A glossary and an index follows the appendixes.  
Notices Used in This Book  
This book contains notices to highlight information or provide safety information:  
Ÿ Notes  
These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.  
Ÿ Attention  
These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or data. An  
attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which  
damage could occur.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
xi  
Related Publications  
Ÿ Caution  
These notices indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you. A  
caution notice is placed just before descriptions of potentially hazardous  
procedure steps or situations.  
Related Publications  
The IBM Netfinity 5000 Hardware Maintenance Manual and the IBM Netfinity 5000  
Hardware Maintenance Manual Supplement are available for purchase. These  
manuals contain error codes, advanced diagnostic procedures, and a parts catalog  
for most models. These manuals are intended for the trained service technician.  
(Diagnostic diskettes are not included.)  
The following manuals pertain to the server's Ethernet controller and are available  
for purchase:  
IBM LAN Technical Reference IEEE 802.2 and NETBIOS API, SC30-3587  
IBM Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Version 2.1 for DOS:  
Programmer’s Reference, SC31-7046  
IBM LAN Server Command and Utilities, S10H-9686  
Guide to LAN Server Books, S10H-9688  
DOS LAN Services and User's Guide, S10H-9684  
Additional publications are available for purchase from IBM. For a list of  
publications available in your country:  
Ÿ In the U.S., Canada, and Puerto Rico, call 1-800-879-2755.  
Ÿ In other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.  
xii Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000  
We appreciate your decision to purchase an IBM Netfinity Server. Your Netfinity  
5000 server is a high-performance server with the capability of microprocessor  
upgrade to a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server. It is ideally suited for  
networking environments that require superior microprocessor performance,  
efficient memory management, flexibility, and large amounts of reliable data  
storage.  
Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key  
considerations during the design of your server. These design features make it  
possible for you to customize the server hardware to meet your business needs of  
today, while providing flexible expansion capabilities for the future.  
Your IBM Netfinity Server comes with a three-year limited warranty and IBM  
Netfinity Server Start Up Support. If you have access to the World Wide Web, you  
can obtain up-to-date information about your Netfinity Server model and other IBM  
Netfinity Server products at the following address:  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/netfinity/  
The Server Library binder that comes with your server contains several compact  
discs (CDs). These CDs provide menu-driven programs to help simplify your  
operating system installation. The CDs also contain numerous application  
programs (no software activation keys required) and many other features at no  
additional cost. For more information, refer to the “ServerGuide and Netfinity  
Manager Information” section of this Server Library.  
If you have not yet set up your server, refer to the “Express Setup and Installation”  
section of this Server Library for information on unpacking the server, attaching  
cables, and installing the operating system.  
This chapter contains an overview of the server features and components.  
5
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)  
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your machine.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
1
This chapter contains:  
Features at a Glance  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
4
6
7
7
9
What Your IBM Netfinity 5000 Server Offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability Features  
Controls and Indicators  
Server Controls  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Expansion Bays  
2
Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Features at a Glance  
Features at a Glance  
The following table summarizes the features of the Netfinity 5000 server.  
Microprocessor  
Expansion Bays  
Integrated Functions  
Ÿ IntelPentiumII  
microprocessor  
with MMXtechnology  
Ÿ 512 KB of level-2 cache (min)  
Ÿ One 3.5-inch diskette drive bay  
Ÿ Two 5.25-inch drive bays, open  
bay supports half-high SCSI  
tape drive  
Ÿ Five 3.5-inch drive bays,  
hot-swappable  
Ÿ Two serial ports  
Ÿ Two universal serial bus (USB)  
ports  
Ÿ System management port (C)  
Ÿ Advanced system management  
processor on system board  
Ÿ One IDE internal connector,  
supports the system IDE  
CD-ROM drive  
Ÿ One parallel port  
Ÿ Mouse port  
Ÿ Keyboard port  
Ÿ 16-bit UltraSCSI controller  
– One external connector  
(16-bit)  
– One internal connector  
(16-bit)  
Ÿ Full-duplex 10/100 Mbps  
Ethernet controller  
Memory  
Ÿ Standard: 64 MB (min),  
expandable to 1 GB  
Ÿ 100 MHz, error correcting code  
(ECC) registered synchronous  
dynamic random access memory  
(SDRAM)  
Upgradable Microcode  
Ÿ BIOS, diagnostics, and  
Netfinity Advanced System  
Management Processor code  
upgrades (when available) can  
update EEPROMs on the  
system board  
Ÿ Four dual-inline memory-module  
(DIMM) sockets  
Diskette Drive  
Power Supply  
Ÿ One 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB  
Hard Disk Drives  
Ÿ 350W with voltage  
auto-selection (110, 120, 220,  
240Vac) and power  
redundancy  
Ÿ Up to five hot-swappable internal  
– 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port  
– Redundant Ethernet  
capability, through the use of  
an optional network interface  
card (NIC)  
hard disk drives are supported  
– Standard—350W  
non-redundant, 175W  
redundant  
– Optional—Additional 175W  
power supply available for  
350W redundancy  
CD-ROM Drive  
Ÿ Standard: IDE  
Ÿ Video controller port, super video  
graphics array (SVGA)  
Ÿ 1 MB video memory  
Keyboard and Auxiliary Device  
(tower models)  
Ÿ Built-in overload and surge  
protection  
Ÿ Automatic restart after a  
momentary loss of power  
Ÿ Keyboard  
Ÿ Mouse  
Security Features  
Ÿ Bolt-down capability  
Expansion Slots  
Ÿ Door lock (tower model only)  
Ÿ Power-on and administrator  
passwords  
Supports up to five adapters  
Ÿ Two shared PCI/ISA slots  
Ÿ Three dedicated PCI slots  
Ÿ Selectable startup sequence  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000  
3
What Your IBM Netfinity 5000 Server Offers  
The IBM Netfinity 5000 server is designed to be cost effective, powerful, and  
flexible. Your server offers:  
Ÿ Impressive performance using an innovative approach to SMP  
The Netfinity 5000 server supports up to two Pentium II microprocessors. Your  
server comes with one Pentium II microprocessor installed on the system  
board. You can install a second microprocessor in your server to enhance  
performance and provide SMP capability.  
Ÿ Large system memory  
The memory subsystem in your server supports up to 1GB1 of system memory.  
The memory controller provides error correcting code (ECC) support for 100  
MHz SDRAM memory.  
Ÿ Integrated network environment support  
Your server supports various network environments. Your Netfinity 5000 server  
comes with a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Controller on the system board. This  
Ethernet controller has an interface for connecting to 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps  
networks. The server automatically selects between 10BASE-T and  
100BASE-TX. The controller provides full-duplex (FDX) capability. Full duplex  
allows simultaneous transmission and reception of data on the Ethernet local  
area network (LAN).  
Ÿ Redundant network interface card  
The addition of an optional, redundant network interface card (NIC) provides a  
failover capability to a redundant Ethernet connection. If a problem occurs with  
the primary Ethernet connection, all Ethernet traffic associated with this primary  
connection is automatically switched to the redundant NIC. This switching  
occurs without data loss and without user intervention.  
Ÿ Redundant power capabilities  
The 350-watt power supply in your server provides redundant power. If your  
server load is less than 175 watts and a problem occurs with one of the power  
modules in the power supply, the other module takes over the load. For power  
loads above 175 watts, you can install a second, optional, power supply to  
provide a full 350 watts of redundant power. If a problem occurs in either  
power module in the primary power supply, the second power supply takes  
over the load for that module.  
Ÿ System-management capabilities  
Your Netfinity 5000 server is shipped with a Netfinity Advanced System  
Management Processor on the system board. This processor, in conjunction  
with the Netfinity Manager provided on your ServerGuide CDs, allows you to  
manage the functions of the Netfinity 5000 server locally and remotely. The  
Advanced System Management processor also provides system monitoring,  
event recording, and dial-out alert capability.  
Note: The Advanced System Management processor is sometimes referred to  
as the service processor.  
1
When referring to hard-disk-drive capacity, GB means 1000000000 bytes; total user-accessible capacity may vary depending on  
operating environment.  
4
Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Refer to the “Advanced System Management Information” section of this Server  
Library for more information.  
Ÿ IBM ServerGuide CDs  
The ServerGuide CDs included with IBM Netfinity servers provide programs to  
help you set up your server and install the network operating system (NOS).  
The ServerGuide program detects the hardware options installed, and provides  
the correct configuration program and device drivers. In addition, the  
ServerGuide CDs include a variety of application programs such as IBM Update  
Connector (to help keep your server BIOS and microcode updated) and IBM  
Netfinity Manager (for systems management).  
For more information about the ServerGuide CDs, see the “ServerGuide and  
Netfinity Manager Information” section of this Server Library.  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000  
5
Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability Features  
Three of the most important factors in server design are reliability, availability, and  
serviceability (RAS). These factors help to ensure the integrity of the data stored  
on your server; that your server is available when you want to use it; and that  
should a failure occur, you can easily diagnose and repair the failure with minimal  
inconvenience.  
The following is an abbreviated list of the built-in RAS features on the IBM Netfinity  
Server. Many of these features are explained in the following chapters of this book.  
Ÿ Menu-driven configuration programs  
Ÿ Menu-driven SCSI configuration programs  
Ÿ Menu-driven setup programs  
Ÿ Menu-driven diagnostic programs  
Ÿ Power-on self-test (POST)  
Ÿ Customer support center 24 hours per day2  
Ÿ Hot-swap hard disk drive bays  
Ÿ Cooling fans with error-sensing capability  
Ÿ Error checking and correcting (ECC) memory  
Ÿ Error codes and messages  
Ÿ Remote systems management through the Netfinity Advanced System  
Management controller  
Ÿ Remote system problem-determination support  
Ÿ Upgradable BIOS, diagnostics, and Netfinity Advanced System Management  
Processor code  
Ÿ Recovery for damaged BIOS  
Ÿ Automatic restart after power failure  
Ÿ Automatic restart on initial system-management processor error condition  
Ÿ Parity checking on the SCSI bus, keyboard interface, and serial ports  
Ÿ Monitoring and reporting the status of hard disk drives, power supplies, and  
cooling systems through status indicators on the front and back of the server  
and on the system board  
Ÿ Early warning of failing hard disk drives and memory  
Ÿ Vital product data (VPD), including serial number information and replacement  
part numbers, stored in nonvolatile memory, making remote maintenance of  
your server more efficient  
Ÿ Standard redundant power supply  
Ÿ Redundant power supply option for enhanced availability  
Ÿ Redundant Ethernet capabilities (with optional adapter)  
2
Response time will vary, depending on the number and nature of calls received.  
6
Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Controls and Indicators  
Controls and Indicators  
The most commonly used controls and status indicators are on the front of your  
server.  
Server Controls  
Tower model  
Rack model  
.1/ Diskette-Eject Button: Press this button to release a diskette from the drive.  
.2/ Diskette Drive In-Use Light: This light comes on when the diskette drive is  
accessed.  
.3/ CD-ROM Manual Tray-Release Opening: Insert a straightened paper clip in  
the opening to release the CD-ROM tray when using the CD-ROM eject  
button is not successful.  
.4/ CD-ROM Eject Button: Press this button to release a CD from the CD-ROM  
drive.  
Note: If the CD-ROM tray does not extend out, insert the end of a  
straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release opening and  
gently pull the tray open.  
.5/ Reset Button: Press this button to reset the server.  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000  
7
Controls and Indicators  
.6/ Power-on switch: Use this switch to turn on your server, or to return the  
server to Standby mode (power is present but the server is not turned on).  
Important  
After you plug the server power cord into an outlet, wait 20 seconds  
before pressing the power switch. (During this time, the  
system-management processor is initializing and the power-on switch  
does not respond.)  
6
CAUTION:  
The Power-On button on the front of the server does not turn off  
the electrical current supplied to the server. The server also  
might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical  
current from the server, ensure that all power cords are  
disconnected from the power source.  
The automatic restart feature, which enables the server to restart following a  
momentary power loss, means that the server is never completely turned off.  
Do not set the server to the Standby mode if any drive in-use light is on. This  
might damage the information stored on a hard disk drive or on a diskette. A  
Power-On Switch protector, which prevents the Power-On Switch from being  
pushed accidentally, is shipped with the server.  
To toggle the server between Standby mode and actively running, press and  
release the Power-On Switch.  
.7/ Side-Cover Release Lever: Use this lever to release the left-side cover.  
.8/ CD-ROM Drive In-Use Light: This light comes on when the CD-ROM drive  
is accessed.  
.9/ Operator LED Panel This panel contains LEDs that light to indicate  
conditions on the server, such as power on or a system error (see “Status  
Indicators” on page 9).  
8
Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Controls and Indicators  
Status Indicators  
The following illustrations identify the indicators located on the front of the server.  
Tower model  
Rack model  
.1/  
Power-On Light: This green LED blinks when the server is in  
Standby mode (power is present but the server is not turned on). The  
blinking changes to a solid (continuous) light when you turn on your  
server remotely (Unattended mode) or by pressing the Power-On  
Switch. If this light is not on, the power cord is not connected or the  
power supply has failed.  
.2/  
.3/  
POST Complete Light: This green LED lights when the server  
completes the power-on self-test (POST) without any errors.  
SCSI Hard Disk Drive In-Use Light: This green LED lights when  
your server is accessing a SCSI device. If this light remains  
illuminated, it might indicate that either the SCSI bus or the system  
microprocessor has stopped.  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000  
9
Controls and Indicators  
.4/  
Primary Microprocessor Activity Light: This green LED blinks to  
indicate the activity of a microprocessor installed in the primary  
microprocessor socket. The LED comes on during POST to indicate  
the presence of the microprocessor.  
.5/  
.6/  
Secondary Microprocessor Activity Light: This green LED blinks to  
show the activity of a microprocessor installed in the secondary  
microprocessor socket. The LED lights during POST to indicate the  
presence of the microprocessor. When you install a secondary  
microprocessor, it becomes the startup microprocessor.  
System Error Light: This amber LED shows that a system error  
occurred. System errors can include high temperature, excess current,  
or failure or errors in the microprocessor, system fan, memory, PCI  
bus, SCSI bus, USB, hard disk drive, diskette drive, serial port,  
keyboard interface, or power supply. When this LED is on, one or  
more LEDs on the system board also might be on, indicating where  
the error occurred (see “System Board LEDs” on page 168).  
.7/  
.8/  
Reserved: This LED is reserved for future use.  
Hard Disk Drive Status Light (Amber): In a RAID environment, this  
amber LED lights continuously when the drive is faulty and needs to  
be replaced. You can replace these hot-swappable drives without  
turning off the server. If you do not have a RAID environment, this  
LED is not operational.  
.9/  
Hard Disk Drive Activity Light (Green): This green LED lights when  
the hard disk drive is being accessed.  
.1ð/  
.11/  
.12/  
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity Light: This green LED shows  
transmission and reception activity on the network.  
Ethernet Link Status Light: This green LED shows an active link  
connection on the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX interface.  
Ethernet Speed Light: This green LED lights when the Ethernet LAN  
speed is 100 Mbps.  
10 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Controls and Indicators  
The following illustrations identify the indicators located on the back of the server.  
Tower model  
Rack model  
.1/ Power Supply Lights: These green LEDs indicate a power good status for  
each of the 175-watt modules in the power supply. If any power supply light  
is not illuminated when the Power-On Light on the front of the server is on,  
there is a problem with that power supply. The power supply shipped with the  
server has two lights, one for each module in the power supply. The optional  
additional power supply has one power module and one green LED. See  
“Installing or Replacing the Power Supply” on page 71 for more information  
about the power supplies.  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000 11  
Input/Output Connectors  
Input/Output Connectors  
The following illustrations identify the connectors located on the back of the server.  
Tower model  
Rack model  
.1/ Power Connector: The server power cable connects here.  
.2/ Serial Connector A: Signal cables for modems or other serial devices  
connect here to the 9-pin serial connector for serial port A. See “Devices and  
I/O Ports” on page 23 for port assignment information.  
.3/ Serial Connector B: Signal cables for modems or other serial devices  
connect here to the 9-pin serial connector for serial port B. See “Devices and  
I/O Ports” on page 23 for port assignment information.  
.4/ Mouse Connector: The mouse cable connects here. This connector is  
sometimes called the auxiliary-device port.  
.5/ Keyboard Connector: The keyboard cable connects here.  
.6/ Ethernet Connector: An unshielded, twisted-pair cable with an RJ-45  
connector attaches here to the 10/100 Ethernet controller on the system  
board.  
12 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Input/Output Connectors  
.7/ Universal Serial Bus (USB) Connector 1: Attach I/O devices with universal  
serial bus (USB) connectors to USB connector 1. You need a 4-pin cable to  
connect a device to this port.  
.8/ Universal Serial Bus (USB) Connector 2: Attach I/O devices with universal  
serial bus (USB) connectors to USB connector 2. You need a 4-pin cable to  
connect a device to this port.  
.9/ Monitor Connector: The monitor signal cable connects here.  
.1ð/ Management C Connector: The cable to attach a modem that is dedicated  
to communication with the system-management processor connects here.  
.11/ SCSI Connector: External SCSI devices attach here. For more information,  
see “Connecting External Options” on page 72.  
.12/ Parallel Connector: A signal cable for a parallel device, such as a printer,  
connects here.  
.13/ PCI Expansion Slots: Cables to the external connectors on PCI adapters  
connect here (slots 3, 4, and 5).  
.14/ PCI/ISA Expansion Slots: Cables to the external connectors on either ISA  
or PCI adapters connect here (slots 1 and 2).  
Chapter 1. Introducing Your Netfinity 5000 13  
Expansion Bays  
Expansion Bays  
Your server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB diskette drive, and one 5.25-inch  
CD-ROM drive. The following illustrations show the server front view with the door  
(if any) removed.  
Tower model  
Rack model  
.1/ CD-ROM Drive: Your server comes with an IDE CD-ROM drive.  
.2/ Open Bay (5.25-inch): The design of your server accommodates an  
additional 5.25-inch half-height device, such as tape or a rewritable optical  
disk drive.  
For information on the supported types of drives and their installation, see  
“Installing or Removing Internal Drives” on page 56.  
.3/ Diskette Drive: The 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB (MB is approximately 1000000  
bytes) diskette drive uses 1 MB (unformatted) or 2 MB (unformatted)  
diskettes.  
.4/ Open Bays (3.5-inch): The 3.5-inch open bays are for hot-swap SCSI hard  
disk drives only.  
For information on the supported types of drives and their installation, see  
“Installing or Removing Internal Drives” on page 56.  
14 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Arranging Your Workspace  
Chapter 2. Arranging Your Workspace  
This chapter contains information on arranging your workspace.  
If you have not already done so, unpack your server. Follow the instructions in the  
“Express Setup and Installation” section of this Server Library.  
If you have a rack model, you can install your options and operating system before  
you install the server in the rack enclosure.  
This chapter contains:  
Arranging Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Glare and Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Air Circulation  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Electrical Outlets and Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Additional Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
15  
Arranging Your Workspace  
Arranging Your Workspace  
To get the most from your server, arrange both the equipment you use and your  
work area to suit your needs and the kind of work you do. Your comfort is of  
foremost importance, but light sources, air circulation, and the location of electrical  
outlets also can affect the way you arrange your workspace.  
Comfort  
Although no single working position is ideal for everyone, here are a few guidelines  
to help you find a position that suits you best.  
Sitting in the same position for a long time can cause fatigue. A good chair can  
make a big difference. The backrest and seat should adjust independently and  
provide good support. The seat should have a curved front to relieve pressure on  
the thighs. Adjust the seat so that your thighs are parallel to the floor and your feet  
are either flat on the floor or on a footrest.  
When using the keyboard, keep your forearms parallel to the floor and your wrists  
in a neutral, comfortable position. Try to keep a light touch on the keyboard and  
your hands and fingers relaxed. You can change the angle of the keyboard for  
maximum comfort by adjusting the position of the keyboard feet.  
Viewing Distance  
Lower  
Back  
Support  
Seat  
Height  
Adjust the monitor so the top of the screen is at, or slightly below, eye level. Place  
the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance, usually 51 to 61 cm (20 to 24 in.),  
and position it so you can view it without having to twist your body. Also position  
other equipment you use regularly, such as the telephone or a mouse, within easy  
reach.  
Glare and Lighting  
Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections from overhead lights,  
windows, and other light sources. Even reflected light from shiny surfaces can  
cause annoying reflections on your monitor screen. Place the monitor at right  
angles to windows and other light sources, when possible. Reduce overhead  
lighting, if necessary, by turning off lights or using lower wattage bulbs. If you  
install the monitor near a window, use curtains or blinds to block the sunlight. You  
might have to adjust the Brightness and Contrast controls on the monitor as the  
room lighting changes throughout the day.  
Where it is impossible to avoid reflections or to adjust the lighting, an antiglare filter  
placed over the screen might be helpful. However, these filters might affect the  
16 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Arranging Your Workspace  
clarity of the image on the screen; try them only after you have exhausted other  
methods of reducing glare.  
Dust buildup compounds problems associated with glare. Remember to clean your  
monitor screen periodically using a soft cloth moistened with a nonabrasive liquid  
glass cleaner.  
Air Circulation  
Your server and monitor produce heat. Your server has one or more fans that pull  
in fresh air and force out hot air. The monitor lets hot air escape through vents.  
Blocking the air vents can cause overheating, which might result in a malfunction or  
damage. Place the server and monitor so that nothing blocks the air vents; usually,  
51 mm (2 in.) of air space is sufficient. Also, make sure the vented air is not  
blowing on someone else.  
Electrical Outlets and Cable Lengths  
The location of electrical outlets and the length of power cords and cables that  
connect to the monitor, printer, and other devices might determine the final  
placement of your server.  
When arranging your workspace:  
Ÿ Avoid the use of extension cords. When possible, plug the server power cord  
directly into an electrical outlet.  
Ÿ Keep power cords and cables neatly routed away from walkways and other  
areas where they might get kicked accidentally.  
For more information about power cords, see “Power Cords” on page 174 or refer  
to the “Legal and Safety Information” section of this Server Library.  
Additional Planning Considerations  
Ÿ Make sure you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical  
outlets for your server, monitor, and any other options that you intend to install.  
7
CAUTION:  
When the power-cord strain-relief bracket option is installed on the  
power cord, the server must be plugged to a power source that is  
easily accessible.  
Ÿ Place your server in a location that is dry. Rain or spilled liquids might damage  
your server.  
Ÿ Leave about 127 mm (5 in.) of space around the front and rear of your server  
to allow the server's cooling system to work properly.  
Chapter 2. Arranging Your Workspace 17  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server  
This chapter provides information about the configuration and utility programs that  
come with your server.  
The configuration programs are part of the basic input/output system (BIOS) that  
comes with your server. Using these programs, you can set the system date and  
time, define input and output device parameters, and define system security.  
This chapter contains:  
Configuration Overview  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
The Configuration/Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
System Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Devices and I/O Ports  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Start Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Advanced Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Plug and Play  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Configuring PCI Features and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts  
Configuring the Ethernet Controller  
Failover for Redundant Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Configuring Failover on OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Configuring Failover on Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Configuring Failover on IntraNetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Using the SCSISelect Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Starting the SCSISelect Utility Program  
SCSISelect Utility Program Choices  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
19  
Configuration Overview  
Configuration Overview  
You play a key role in how your server allocates resources to organize and  
interconnect hardware devices and software programs. This allocation process is  
referred to as configuration. The steps required to configure your server depend on  
the number and types of devices and programs that you install.  
Your server supports several types of adapters. Because of this flexibility, you can  
choose from among thousands of adapters and devices that comply with any of the  
following standards:  
Ÿ Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)  
Ÿ Industry Standard Architecture (ISA)  
Ÿ Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)  
In general, the greater the number and variety of hardware devices and software  
programs that you install in your server, the more you will have to interact with your  
server and your devices to correctly configure your system.  
Your server comes with the following hardware configuration utility programs:  
Ÿ Configuration/Setup Utility  
With the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program, you can configure  
system-board functions, such as serial and parallel port assignments; change  
interrupt request settings; and change the startup sequence for drives that you  
install. You can also use this utility program to set passwords for starting up  
the server and accessing the Configuration/Setup Utility program.  
Ÿ SCSISelect Utility  
With the built-in SCSISelect Utility program, you can configure the SCSI  
devices that you install in your server. You can use SCSISelect to change  
default values, resolve configuration conflicts, and perform a low-level format on  
a SCSI hard disk drive.  
Before installing a new device or program, read the documentation that comes with  
it. Reading the instructions helps you determine the steps required for installation  
and configuration. The following actions are typically, but not always, required to  
configure your server.  
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and record the current  
configuration settings.  
2. Set switches on the server system board.  
See “System Board Switches” on page 170 for the meanings of the system  
board switches.  
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.  
See the device installation instructions.  
4. Install the device in the server.  
See Chapter 4, “Installing Options” on page 39.  
5. Install software programs.  
Refer to the information provided with the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager  
Information” section of this Server Library and with your operating system for  
more information.  
20 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
The Configuration/Setup Utility  
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.  
See “Resolving Configuration Conflicts” on page 30.  
The Configuration/Setup Utility  
For most configurations, the server will operate using the default system settings.  
You need to change the settings only to resolve configuration conflicts or to enable  
or change device functions.  
When you want or need to change the default settings, the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program provides a convenient way to display and change the settings.  
After you run and exit the Configuration/Setup Utility program, configuration  
information is stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). While the  
server is powered off, the configuration information remains available for the next  
system startup.  
Always run the Configuration/Setup Utility program if you add or remove any  
hardware option, or if you receive an error message instructing you to do so.  
Review this chapter and the information that comes with the option before making  
changes. Also, record the current settings (see Chapter 7, “Server Records and  
Specifications” on page 161) before making any changes.  
To start the Configuration/Setup Utility program:  
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.  
2. When the messages Press F1 for Configuration/Setup and Press F2 for  
Diagnostics appear, select the action you need.  
Ÿ To configure your server, press F1 to select Configuration/Setup Utility.  
The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu appears. For information about  
the menus, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
Note: If you enter a power-on password and an administrator password  
has been set, a limited menu appears on the screen. To access  
the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu, you must enter the  
administrator password.  
Ÿ To run the system diagnostics, press F2 to select Diagnostic Utility.  
The Diagnostic Utility main menu appears. For information about running  
the system diagnostics, see “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111.  
Important  
If a defective PCI adapter is causing the system to stop responding during  
startup, you can press Alt+F1 here. This will cause the server to bypass  
PCI device initialization (except video) and go directly to the  
Configuration/Setup Utility, where you can disable the defective PCI  
adapter. Disabling the defective PCI adapter should enable you to  
complete a normal startup when you restart the server.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 21  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
From the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu you can select settings  
you want to change.  
Pressing F1 displays Help information for a selected menu item.  
Notes:  
1. If you enter only the power-on password and an administrator (supervisor-level)  
password is also set, a limited version of the menu appears. To view the full  
Configuration/Setup Utility menu you must enter the administrator password.  
2. The choices on some menus might differ slightly, depending on the BIOS  
version that comes with your server.  
To change configuration settings:  
1. Use the Up Arrow () key to select the item you want to change; then, press  
Enter.  
2. Select the configuration setting you want to change. Use the Right Arrow ()  
or Left Arrow () key to highlight the menu, if needed.  
3. Use the Right Arrow () or Left Arrow () key to select the appropriate setting  
for the selected item.  
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each setting that you want to change. Press Esc  
to return to the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.  
5. After making changes, you can select:  
Ÿ Save Settings to save the selected changes.  
Ÿ Restore Settings to delete the selected changes.  
Ÿ Load Default Settings to cancel the changes and restore the factory  
settings.  
6. To exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, select Exit Setup.  
7. The system prompts you to confirm your choice. You can return to the  
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, or exit.  
System Summary  
Select this choice to display configuration information, such as the type and speed  
of the microprocessor, and amount of memory.  
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on this summary screen.  
You cannot edit the fields.  
System Information  
Select this choice to display information about your Netfinity 5000 server, and to  
view the interrupt request (IRQ) settings for the SCSI and Ethernet controllers on  
the system board, and for other PCI and ISA adapters that you purchase and  
install.  
Changes that you make on other menus might appear on this summary screen.  
22 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
Product Data  
Select this choice to view system information such as the machine type and model,  
the system serial number, the system board identifier, and the revision level or  
issue date of the flash electronically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) and  
BIOS.  
System Card Data  
Select this choice to view the system board model, submodel, system serial  
number, system board identifier, DASD backplane identifier, power backplane  
identifier, and identifiers for power supply 1 and power supply 2.  
PCI Routing  
Select this choice to view the interrupt request (IRQ) settings for PCI adapters and  
for the Ethernet, SCSI, and other controllers on the system board. See “PCI Bus  
Control” on page 29 for information about changing the PCI IRQ settings.  
Devices and I/O Ports  
Software recognizes ports from their port assignments. Each port must have a  
unique port assignment. The Configuration/Setup Utility program normally handles  
this, but you might have special hardware or software that requires you to change  
these assignments.  
Note: Serial port A can be shared by the system-management processor and  
operating system. Serial port B is used by the operating system only.  
Management port C is controlled exclusively by the system-management  
processor, cannot be used by the operating system, and cannot be  
configured using the Configuration/Setup Utility program. See the  
“Advanced System Management Information” section of this Server Library  
for information about configuring serial ports A and C.  
Select the Devices and I/O Ports choice to view or change the assignments for  
devices and input/output ports.  
You can add serial ports by installing a serial adapter in an expansion slot. See  
the documentation that comes with the serial adapter for information about port  
assignments.  
You can configure the parallel port as standard, as bidirectional, as an Extended  
Capabilities Port (ECP), or as an Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP). Bidirectional,  
ECP, and EPP are all bidirectional modes; in all three modes, data can be both  
read from and written to a device. ECP and EPP are industry-standard,  
high-performance bidirectional modes. Which one of these modes you choose  
depends on what mode your device supports.  
Note: When you configure the parallel port as bidirectional, ECP, or EPP, use an  
IEEE 1284-compliant cable. The maximum length of the cable must not  
exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet).  
You can configure the mouse and diskette controller as enabled or disabled, and  
configure the type of diskette drive.  
You can view the type of video controller and the amount of video memory  
installed.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 23  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
You can configure the IDE channel (enabled or disabled) and view the IDE Primary  
Master Device (type, size, transfer selection and mode, and logical block  
addressing (LBA) mode).  
To display or change the port assignments:  
1. Select Devices and I/O Ports.  
2. Select a device or port; then, use the Left Arrow () or Right Arrow () key to  
advance through the settings available.  
Date and Time  
Select this choice to set the system date and time.  
The system time is in a 24-hour format: hour/minute/second. The system date is  
in standard format for your country. For example, in the United States, the format  
is MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year).  
Select Date and Time; then, use the Left Arrow () or Right Arrow () key to  
advance through each data field. Type the new information; the system saves the  
information as you type it.  
System Security  
To control access to the information in your server, you can implement security  
features, such as adding passwords and defining a system owner's name that  
displays during startup. Implementing these security measures helps you to ensure  
the integrity of the data and programs that are stored in your server.  
Note: The default values for all security-related data fields are given in Table 14  
on page 164 and following.  
After setting a power-on password, you can enable the unattended-start mode.  
This locks the keyboard and mouse, but allows the server to start the operating  
system. The keyboard and mouse remain locked until you enter the correct  
password.  
To set, change, or delete a password:  
1. Select System Security.  
2. Select the password that you want to change.  
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.  
After you have set a power-on or administrator password, you must enter the  
password whenever you turn on the server. (The passwords do not appear on the  
screen as you type them.)  
24 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
Type of Password  
Results  
No password set  
Ÿ No password required to start system.  
Ÿ You can access all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program main menu.  
Power-on password only  
Ÿ You must enter the password to complete the system startup.  
Ÿ You can access all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program main menu.  
Ÿ If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to  
the server by using switch 8 on the system board. See “Using  
the Power-on Password Menu” on page 25 for details.  
Administrator password only  
Ÿ You must enter the password to enter the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program.  
Ÿ You can access all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program main menu.  
Ÿ If the administrator password is forgotten, it cannot be  
overridden or removed. You must replace the system board.  
Administrator and power-on  
password  
Ÿ You can enter either password to complete the system startup.  
– Administrator password provides access to all choices on  
the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu. You  
can set, change, or delete both the administrator and  
power-on passwords, and allow a power-on password to  
be changed by the user.  
– Power-on password provides access to a limited set of  
choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility program main  
menu. This might include changing or deleting the  
power-on password.  
Ÿ If you forget the power-on password, and the administrator  
password has been set, use the administrator password at the  
password prompt. Then, start the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program and change the power-on password.  
Using the Power-on Password Menu  
When a power-on password is set, you must enter a password each time you start  
the system.  
To set a power-on password:  
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press  
Enter.  
The Power-on Password menu appears.  
2. Type the password in the Enter Power-on Password data field.  
You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9)  
for your power-on password. Keep a record of your password in a secure  
place.  
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Power-on Password Again data field and type  
the password again.  
Note: A message appears if the two passwords do not match. If this  
happens, press Enter to return to the Power-On Password menu.  
4. Select Change Power-on Password to save the new password; then, press  
Enter.  
5. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to change the power-on  
password. Press Esc to return to the System Security menu.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 25  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
When a power-on password is set, POST does not complete until you enter the  
password. If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the  
server through one of the following methods:  
Ÿ If an administrator password has been set, enter the administrator password at  
the power-on prompt (see “Using the Administrator Password Menu” on  
page 27 for details). Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and change  
the power-on password as described in steps 1 through 5 above.  
Ÿ Use the Bypass-Power-On-Password switch on the system board to temporarily  
bypass the power-on password.  
1. See “Preparing to Install Options” on page 43 through “Preparing a Tower  
Model” on page 44 or through “Preparing a Rack Model” on page 46 for  
instructions on powering off the server and removing the cover. Then, refer  
to the system-board diagram inside your server for the location of the  
switch block.  
2. Locate switch 8 (see “System Board Switches” on page 170).  
3. Set switch 8 on the switch block to On, to bypass the power-on password.  
4. Restart the server, then start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and  
change the power-on password as described in steps 1 through 5 above.  
5. Turn the server off again.  
6. Set switch 8 back to Off.  
7. Restart the server.  
To delete a power-on password:  
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press  
Enter.  
The Power-on Password menu appears.  
2. Select Delete Power-on Password; then, press Enter.  
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to delete the power-on password.  
Press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System Security menu.  
To allow the server to start in unattended mode when a power-on password  
is set:  
Note: The Allow for unattended boot with password data field must be set to  
On for the system to support locally or remotely scheduled system  
shutdowns or restarts in unattended-start mode.  
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press  
Enter.  
The Power-on Password menu appears.  
2. Select Allow for unattended boot with password. Press the Left Arrow ()  
or Right Arrow () key to toggle the entry to On.  
If no power-on password is set on the server, this option has no effect.  
26 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
Using the Administrator Password Menu  
The administrator password (sometimes called a supervisor-level password)  
controls access to some features of the server, including the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program.  
Important  
If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be overridden  
or removed. You must replace the system board.  
To set an administrator password:  
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu; then, press  
Enter.  
2. Type the password in the Enter Administrator Password data field.  
A password can contain any combination of up to seven alphanumeric  
characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9). Keep a record of your password in a secure  
place.  
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Administrator Password Again data field and  
type the password again.  
Note: A message appears if the two passwords do not match. If this  
happens, press Enter to return to the Administrator Password menu.  
4. Select Change Administrator Password to save the new password; then,  
press Enter. The password becomes effective immediately.  
To delete an administrator password:  
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu; then, press  
Enter.  
2. Select Delete Administrator Password; then, press Enter.  
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to delete the administrator  
password. Press Esc to return to the System Security menu.  
To enable a user to change the power-on password:  
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu; then, press  
Enter.  
2. Select Power-on password changeable by user. Press the Left Arrow () or  
Right Arrow () key to toggle the entry to Yes.  
When this choice is enabled, System Security appears on the limited  
Configuration/Setup menu. The System Security menu contains the Power-on  
Password choice.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 27  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
Defining a System Owner's Name  
You can specify a system owner's name that displays during POST each time that  
your server is started. If you set an administrator password, only the administrator  
can set, change, or delete the system owner's name.  
To set the system owner's name:  
1. Select System Owners Name from the System Security menu; then, press  
Enter.  
The System Owners Name screen appears.  
2. Type the name in the Enter System Owners Name String data field. You can  
use any combination of up to 15 characters and spaces in your system owner's  
name.  
3. Press the Down Arrow () key to select the Set or Change System Owners  
Name data field.  
4. Press Enter to set the name or change a previously defined name.  
To delete the system owner's name, select Delete Stored System Owners Name;  
then, press Enter.  
Start Options  
Start options take effect when you start your server.  
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as the keyboard speed.  
You also can specify whether the keyboard number lock (NumLock) starts on or off.  
You also can enable the server to run in disketteless and monitorless operation.  
You can specify the startup sequence the server is to use to determine the device  
from which the operating system loads. For example, you can define a startup  
sequence that checks for a CD-ROM, then checks an installed hard disk drive, and  
then checks a network adapter.  
Note: The default startup options, including startup sequence, are given in  
Table 14 on page 164.  
Attention: If the CD-ROM drive contains a startable CD, you must remove the CD  
if you want to use a startup sequence that begins with a startable diskette.  
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks at startup for changes in the  
master boot record. You also can also choose to run POST in the enhanced mode  
or in the quick mode.  
Select Start Options; then, use the Left Arrow () or Right Arrow () key to  
advance through each data field.  
Advanced Setup  
Select Advanced Setup to change values for advanced hardware features, such  
as cache control, PCI bus control, memory settings, and advanced ISA settings.  
Note: A warning message displays above the choices on this menu, to alert you  
that the system may malfunction if these options are configured incorrectly.  
Follow the instructions on the screen carefully.  
28 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility  
Use the Left Arrow () or Right Arrow () key to highlight the options for the  
selected menu item.  
Core Chipset Control  
Select this choice to modify settings that control features of the core chip set on the  
system board. Do not make changes here unless directed to do so by an IBM  
authorized service representative.  
PCI Bus Control  
Select PCI Bus Control to:  
Ÿ Change the master latency timer values for PCI bus 0 and PCI bus 1.  
Ÿ Specify the planar interrupt routing (IRQs) for SCSI, Ethernet, video, and USB.  
Ÿ Specify the slot interrupt routing (IRQs) for PCI slots.  
Ÿ Enable and disable PCI device types (SCSI, video, Ethernet) and slots. When  
a PCI adapter is defective, you can use Alt+F1 at startup and then disable the  
PCI adapter in order to enable the system to start up successfully.  
Note: Any changes you make to IRQs will not be reflected in the PCI Interrupt  
Routing selection of the System Information menu until you restart the  
server.  
Cache Control  
Select this choice to define the microprocessor cache state as enabled or disabled,  
and to define the microprocessor cache type as Write-back or Write-through.  
Selecting write-back mode will provide the maximum system performance.  
Memory Settings  
Select this choice to view the server banks of memory and to enable or disable  
selected rows of memory within those banks.  
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory configuration, the Netfinity  
5000 server can automatically disable the failing row of memory and continue  
operating with reduced memory capacity. If this occurs, you must manually enable  
the row of memory after the problem is corrected. Choose Memory Settings from  
the Advanced Setup menu; then use the the Up Arrow () or Down Arrow () key  
to highlight the row that you want to enable. Use the Left Arrow () or Right Arrow  
() key to select Enable.  
Advanced ISA Settings  
Use this selection to set the timer delay for ISA I/O recovery.  
Server Processor IRQ Settings  
Use this selection to specify the IRQ the system-management processor is to use.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 29  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
Plug and Play  
Most adapters designed for PCI slots are Plug and Play devices that are  
auto-configuring. However, many ISA adapters are not Plug and Play devices and  
you must allocate the system resources that the adapter will use. Select Plug and  
Play to identify the available system resources:  
Ÿ Memory  
Ÿ I/O ports  
Ÿ DMA  
Ÿ Interrupt  
Note: The menus do not contain resources that are used by the system or by  
previously installed Plug and Play adapters.  
Select Plug and Play; then, use the Up Arrow () and Down Arrow () key to  
highlight the system resource that you want to change. Use the Left Arrow () or  
Right Arrow () key to toggle from Plug and Play to ISA Legacy for the selected  
menu choice.  
Error Log  
Select Error Log to view the three most recent power-on self-test (POST) errors  
the system has generated, or to view the system error log. You can clear both  
error logs from this screen by selecting Clear Error Logs.  
Configuring PCI Features and Options  
PCI devices automatically communicate with the server configuration information.  
This usually results in automatic configuration of a PCI device. If a conflict does  
occur, see “Resolving Configuration Conflicts.”  
Multiple-function PCI adapters use more than one interrupt. When you install one  
of these adapters, review the IRQ assignments in the Configuration/Setup utility  
programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). Verify that the IRQ assignments  
are correct.  
Your Netfinity 5000 server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI  
adapters. This technique enables you to install a variety of PCI adapters that  
currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts. For information on manually  
overriding the interrupt setting, see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29.  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
The resources used by your server consist of IRQs, DMA, I/O port addresses, and  
memory. This information is useful when a resource configuration conflict occurs.  
Conflicts in the configuration occur if:  
Ÿ A device is installed that requires the same resource as another device. (For  
example, a conflict occurs when two adapters try to write to the same address  
space.)  
Ÿ A device resource is changed (for example, changing jumper settings).  
Ÿ A device function is changed (for example, assigning COM1 to two serial ports).  
30 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
Ÿ A software program is installed that requires the same resource as a hardware  
device.  
The steps required to resolve a configuration error are determined by the number  
and variety of hardware devices and software programs you install. If a hardware  
configuration error is detected, a configuration error message appears after the  
server completes POST and before the operating system is loaded. You can  
bypass the error by pressing Esc while the error message is displayed.  
The Configuration/Setup Utility program configures the system hardware and PCI  
interrupt requests. The program does not consider the requirements of the  
operating system or the application programs. See “Resolving Software  
Configuration Conflicts” for additional information.  
Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts  
Use the following information to help resolve hardware configuration conflicts:  
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view and change resources  
used by the system board functions. Record the current settings before making  
any changes. (See “The Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 21 for  
instructions.)  
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing the conflict.  
3. Change adapter jumpers or switches. Some devices use jumpers and switches  
to define the system resources that the device needs. If the settings are  
incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be shared, a conflict occurs and  
the device will remain deactivated by the configuration program.  
4. Change system board jumpers or switches. See “Preparing to Install Options”  
on page 43 for instructions on removing the cover. Then, refer to the  
system-board diagram inside your server.  
5. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurations are not supported. If you  
must remove an adapter, see “Installing or Removing Adapters” on page 50.  
Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts  
The memory-address space and IRQs used by some hardware options might  
conflict with addresses defined for use through application programs or the  
expanded memory specification (EMS). (EMS is used only with DOS.)  
If a conflict exists, one or more of the following conditions might exist:  
Ÿ The system cannot load the operating system.  
Ÿ The system does not work.  
Ÿ An application program does not operate, or it returns an error.  
Ÿ Screen messages indicate a conflict exists.  
To resolve conflicts, you can change the software or hardware configuration.  
Note: Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view the addresses used by  
your system board functions.  
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the addresses used  
by the application program or the device driver. You can use the  
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change addresses.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 31  
Configuring the Ethernet Controller  
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict, refer to your  
operating-system documentation or the documentation supplied with the device  
drivers.  
Configuring the Ethernet Controller  
Your Netfinity 5000 server comes with an Ethernet controller on the system board.  
The Ethernet controller provides 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX support through the  
RJ-45 connector on the back of your server.  
When you connect your server to the network, the Ethernet controller automatically  
detects the data-transfer rate (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) on the network and then sets  
the controller to operate at the appropriate rate. That is, the Ethernet controller will  
adjust to the network data rate, whether the data rate is standard Ethernet  
(10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX), half duplex (HDX), or full duplex (FDX).  
This process is also known as auto-negotiation. This auto-negotiation occurs  
without software intervention. The controller supports half-duplex (HDX) and  
full-duplex (FDX) modes at both speeds.  
Auto-negotiation works only if the hub or switch to which your server is connected  
also supports auto-negotiation. If the hub or switch does not support  
auto-negotiation, the speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) will still be detected correctly,  
but half-duplex mode will always be selected. A full-duplex switch that does not  
support auto-negotiation will not attach to the Netfinity 5000 server in full-duplex  
mode.  
In this case, if you want the network to operate in full-duplex mode, you must  
manually override the settings to obtain a full-duplex connection. To do this, your  
server must have a device driver that supports manual overrides. Use the  
ServerGuide CDs to install this device driver. Refer to the “ServerGuide and  
Netfinity Manager Information” section of this Server Library for instructions on  
installing device drivers. The ServerGuide CDs contain IBM Update Connector, a  
dial-up3 program that keeps your BIOS and device drivers current. Verify that you  
have installed the appropriate device driver. Also, refer to your Ethernet  
documentation for additional information on operating modes, manual overrides,  
and device drivers (see “Related Publications” on page xii).  
Attention:  
Ÿ The 10BASE-T Ethernet and the 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet cabling in the  
network must be Category 5 or higher to meet various standards, including  
electromagnetic compatibility.  
Ÿ You must install a device driver to enable your operating system to address the  
Ethernet controller. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install this device driver.  
Refer to the information in the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information”  
section of this Server Library for instructions on installing device drivers, or for  
more information about the ServerGuide CDs.  
Fast Ethernet operates at a data rate of up to 100 Mbps. However, except for the  
different operating speeds, Fast Ethernet and standard Ethernet are structurally  
3
Response time will vary, depending on the number and nature of calls received.  
32 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Failover for Redundant Ethernet  
identical. Most applications and protocols that are currently installed on a standard  
Ethernet system can be seamlessly migrated to a Fast Ethernet system. Because  
of the equivalence of the two types of Ethernet, mixed Ethernet and Fast Ethernet  
systems also can be designed and implemented.  
The bandwidth required at each workstation connected to a server is generally far  
less than the bandwidth required at the server. This is because the server might  
have to handle the bandwidth of multiple workstations at the same time. A  
cost-effective solution to the bandwidth requirements of this type of system is a  
mixed Ethernet and Fast Ethernet network. This mixed network consists of  
standard Ethernet connections at the workstations and Fast Ethernet connections at  
the servers.  
The Ethernet controller is a PCI device, and is therefore, a Plug and Play device.  
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controller for your operating  
system before you use the Ethernet controller.  
Notes:  
1. For troubleshooting information, see “Troubleshooting the 10/100 Mbps  
Ethernet Controller” on page 149.  
2. The Ethernet controller supports the operating systems that your server  
supports. To find out which operating systems your server supports, go to the  
following World Wide Web address:  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/compat/  
If you need additional Ethernet connections, you can install an Ethernet adapter,  
such as an IBM 10/100 Ethernet adapter. Review your network-adapter  
documentation for any additional configuration requirements.  
Note: If you are installing an IBM 10/100 Ethernet adapter, be sure to run the  
Ethernet controller diagnostics and record the Ethernet controller  
configuration information before you install the adapter.  
Failover for Redundant Ethernet  
Your Netfinity 5000 server has an integrated Ethernet controller. The IBM Netfinity  
10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter is an optional redundant network interface card (NIC  
adapter) that you can install in your Netfinity 5000 server. If you install this NIC  
adapter and connect it to the same logical segment as the primary Ethernet  
controller, you can configure the server to support a failover function. You can  
configure either the integrated Ethernet controller or the NIC adapter as the primary  
Ethernet controller. In failover mode, if the primary Ethernet controller detects a  
link failure, all Ethernet traffic associated with it is switched to the redundant  
(secondary) controller. This switching occurs without any user intervention.  
Applications with active sessions do not experience any data loss. When the  
primary link is restored to an operational state, the Ethernet traffic automatically  
switches back to the primary Ethernet controller.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 33  
Failover for Redundant Ethernet  
Notes:  
1. Only one controller in the redundant pair is active at any given time. For  
example, if the primary Ethernet controller is active, then the secondary  
Ethernet controller cannot be used for any other network operation.  
2. Your operating system determines the maximum number of IBM Netfinity  
10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters that you can install in your Netfinity 5000  
server. See the documentation that comes with the adapter for more  
information.  
The failover feature currently is supported by OS/2, Windows NT, and  
IntraNetWare. The setup required for each operating system follows.  
Configuring Failover on OS/2  
1. Install the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with  
the adapter and in “Installing or Removing Adapters” on page 50.  
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter  
device driver.  
3. Using the MPTS utility program, select the driver from the list and select the  
Edit button.  
Note: Only one driver instance needs to be loaded for each redundant pair of  
Ethernet controllers.  
4. Change the PermaNet Server Feature keyword to TRUE and specify the  
Primary and Standby slots that contain the redundant pair. Refer to “System  
Board Illustration” on page 168 for the locations and slot numbers of the PCI  
slots. The integrated controller is located in slot 9.  
5. To enable the writing of messages to the IBMCOM\LANTRAN.LOG file when a  
failover occurs:  
a. Copy the file PCNETOS2.EXE from the OS2 directory of the diskette  
created by the ServerGuide program to your hard disk drive.  
b. Add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS file:  
Run=d:\path\PCNETOS2.EXE  
where d and path are the drive and path to which you copied  
PCNETOS2.EXE.  
6. Restart the server.  
The failover function is now enabled.  
Configuring Failover on Windows NT  
1. Install the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with  
the adapter and in “Installing or Removing Adapters” on page 50.  
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter  
device driver.  
3. From the NT desktop, select Control Panel, then select the Network icon, then  
the Adapters tab.  
4. Highlight one of the adapters that will be in the redundant pair and then select  
the Properties... button.  
34 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Using the SCSISelect Utility Program  
5. Check the Grouping box. This will show the possible combinations for  
redundant pairs.  
6. Select the adapter pair you want and then select OK. Note that the integrated  
Ethernet controller is located at PCI bus 0, slot 9.  
7. Select Close to exit from the Network setup.  
When you restart the server, the failover function will be in effect.  
If a failover occurs, a message is written to the NT Event Viewer log. If the DMI  
instrumentation code for the integrated Ethernet controller is active (PCNET.EXE  
was run), a pop-up message is generated also.  
Configuring Failover on IntraNetWare  
1. Install the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with  
the adapter and in “Installing or Removing Adapters” on page 50.  
2. Load the device driver by using the following command:  
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW.LAN PRIMARY=x SECONDARY=y  
where d and path are the drive and path where the driver is located, and x and  
y are the PCI slot numbers where the redundant pair is located.  
The slot number associated with the integrated Ethernet controller can vary  
depending upon the configuration of the Netfinity 5000 server. To determine  
the slot number, load the driver with no parameters. The driver will display the  
available slot numbers. The slot number that is greater that 10000 will be the  
slot number of the integrated Ethernet controller. When the slot number of the  
integrated Ethernet controller is determined, reload the driver with the  
appropriate parameters.  
3. When the driver is loaded, bind it to a protocol stack.  
The failover function is now enabled. If a failover occurs:  
Ÿ A message is generated to the operating system console.  
Ÿ The custom counters for the device driver contain variables that define the  
state of the failover function and the location of the redundant pair. You can  
use the NetWare Monitor to view the custom counters.  
Using the SCSISelect Utility Program  
Your server comes with a menu-driven configuration utility program, called  
SCSISelect, that you can use to view and change SCSI settings.  
You can use the SCSISelect Utility program to:  
Ÿ View and change the device configuration  
Ÿ Perform a low-level format or verify the media on a SCSI hard disk drive.  
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 35  
Using the SCSISelect Utility Program  
Starting the SCSISelect Utility Program  
You can access this program when you start the server. The SCSISelect prompt  
appears after the IBM Netfinity Logo appears. Press Ctrl+A immediately after the  
SCSISelect prompt appears.  
Use the Up Arrow () and Down Arrow () key to move the highlight bar to the  
various menu choices. Press Esc to return to the previous menu. Also, you can  
press the F5 key to switch between color and monochrome modes (if your monitor  
permits). To change the settings of the displayed items, follow the directions on the  
screen.  
The SCSI controller in your server is a dual channel device. Select channel B for  
internal devices, channel A for external devices.  
SCSISelect Utility Program Choices  
The following choices appear on the SCSISelect Utility program menu:  
Ÿ Configure/View Host Adapter Settings  
Ÿ SCSI Disk Utilities  
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings  
To view or change the SCSI controller settings, select Configure/View Host  
Adapter Settings and follow the directions on the screen. This menu has the  
following choices:  
Ÿ Host Adapter SCSI ID  
Select this choice to change the SCSI ID of the SCSI controller from its default  
value of 7. Do not assign the SCSI controller to a SCSI ID already in use,  
such as 14, which is used by the daughterboard card (SAF-TE) on the DASD  
backplane.  
Ÿ SCSI Parity Checking  
The default value is Enabled. This value should not be changed.  
Ÿ Host Adapter SCSI Termination  
The default value is Enabled. This value should not be changed.  
Ÿ Boot Device Options  
Select this choice to configure startable device parameters. Before you can  
make updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you  
want to configure.  
Ÿ SCSI Device Configuration  
Select this choice to configure SCSI device parameters. Before you can make  
updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you want to  
configure.  
36 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Using the SCSISelect Utility Program  
Ÿ Advanced Configuration Options  
Select this choice to view or change the settings for advanced configuration  
options. These options include enabling support for large hard disk drives and  
support for BIOS parameters if BIOS is enabled.  
To reset to the the host adapter defaults, press F6; then, follow the instructions on  
the screen.  
SCSI Disk Utilities  
To see the IDs that are assigned to each SCSI device, to format a SCSI device, or  
to scan the disk for media defects, select SCSI Disk Utilities from the SCSISelect  
Utility program menu.  
To use the utility program, select a drive from the list. Read the screens carefully  
before making a selection.  
Note: If the following screen displays, you might have pressed Ctrl+A before the  
selected drives were ready. Restart the server, and watch the SCSISelect  
messages as each drive spins up. After the drive that you want to view or  
format spins up, press Ctrl+A.  
à
ð
Unexpected SCSI Command Failure  
4
Target SCSI ID:  
SCSI CDB Sent:  
ð3 ðð ðð ðð ðE ðð ð7 ðð ð2 ðð  
ððh - No host adapter error  
ð2h - Check condition  
ð2h - Not ready  
ð4h  
Host Adapter Status:  
Target Status:  
Sense Key:  
+Sense Code:  
+Sense Code Qualifier:  
ð2h  
Press 'Esc' to continue.  
á
ñ
Chapter 3. Configuring Your Server 37  
Using the SCSISelect Utility Program  
Performing a Low-Level Disk Format  
You can perform a low-level format on hard disk drives using the Format Disk  
feature of the SCSISelect Utility program.  
Depending on the hard disk capacity, the low-level format program could take up to  
two hours.  
When To Use the Format Disk Program  
Use the Format Disk program:  
Ÿ When you are installing software that requires a low-level format  
Ÿ When you get recurring messages from the diagnostic tests directing you to run  
the Low-Level Format program on the hard disk  
Ÿ As a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive.  
Note: For information about backing up all of your files, see your operating-system  
documentation.  
Starting the Low-Level Format  
Attention: The low-level format erases all data and programs.  
1. If the hard disk drive is working, make a backup copy of all the files and  
programs on the hard disk drive.  
2. Select Format Disk; then, follow the instructions on the screen.  
Note: Hard disk drives normally contain more tracks than their stated capacity,  
to allow for defective tracks. A message appears on the screen if the  
defect limit is reached. If this happens, have the system serviced.  
3. To install an operating system after the hard disk drive is formatted, refer to the  
ServerGuide information in the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager  
Information” section of this Server Library that comes with your server.  
Verifying the Disk Media  
Select Verify Disk Media to scan the selected hard disk drive for media defects,  
such as bad tracks. All recoverable defects will be remapped.  
The Verify Disk Media program takes about 15 to 20 minutes to complete.  
38 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Chapter 4. Installing Options  
This chapter provides instructions to help you add options to your server. Some  
option-removal instructions are provided, in case you need to remove one option to  
install another. If you have several internal options to install, these instructions  
enable you to add them all at one time.  
This chapter contains:  
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Electrical Safety  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Handling Static-Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Preparing to Install Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Preparing a Tower Model  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Preparing a Rack Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Working with Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Adapter Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Installing or Removing Adapters  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Working with Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Installing or Removing Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Location of Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Types of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
SCSI Devices  
Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)  
Installing or Removing Drives in Bays A and B (Removable Media) . . . . . 60  
Installing or Removing a Drive in Bay C (Diskette Drive)  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
. . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Installing or Removing Drives in Bays 1 through 5 (Hard Disk Drives) . . . . 63  
Installing Microprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Installing Microprocessor Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Installing or Replacing a Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Installing or Replacing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Connecting External Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Adding External SCSI Devices  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Attaching External Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Adding Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Installing a U-Bolt and Security Cable  
Completing the Installation  
Completing the Tower Model Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Completing the Rack Model Installation  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Updating the Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Serial Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Management Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Parallel Port Connector  
Video Port Connector  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Keyboard and Mouse Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
SCSI Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Internal SCSI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
External SCSI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Universal Serial Bus Ports  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Ethernet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
39  
Before You Begin  
Before You Begin  
Before you begin to install options in your server, read the following information:  
Notes:  
1. Become familiar with the safety and handling guidelines specified under the  
“Legal and Safety Information” section of this Server Library, and under “Safety  
Information Statements” on page vii, “Electrical Safety” on page 41, and  
“Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 42. These guidelines will help you  
work safely while working with your server and options.  
2. Make sure you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical  
outlets for your server, monitor, and any other options you intend to install.  
3. Place your server in a location that is dry. Rain or spilled liquids might damage  
your server.  
4. Have a supply of 1 MB and 2 MB, 3.5-inch diskettes available.  
5. Back up all important data before you make changes to hard disk drives.  
6. Have a small flat-blade screwdriver available.  
7. Be sure to leave space around the server to allow the server cooling system to  
work properly.  
Ÿ On a tower model, leave about 127 mm (5 in.) of space around the front  
and rear of the server.  
Ÿ On a rack model, refer to the documentation that comes with the rack.  
8. For a list of supported options for the Netfinity 5000 server, refer to  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/compat on the World Wide Web.  
40 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Electrical Safety  
Electrical Safety  
10  
CAUTION:  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables  
can be hazardous. To avoid personal injury or equipment damage,  
disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,  
networks, and modems before you open the server covers, unless  
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.  
For your safety, always do the following before removing the cover:  
1. Turn off the server and any attached devices, such as printers, monitors, and  
external drives.  
Note: If you are in the United Kingdom and have a modem or fax machine  
attached to your server, you must disconnect the telephone line from  
the server before unplugging any power cords (also known as power  
cables). When reassembling your server, you must reconnect the  
telephone line after you plug in the power cords.  
2. Unplug all the power cords from electrical outlets.  
3. Disconnect all communication cables from external receptacles.  
4. Disconnect all cables and power cords from the back of the server.  
Note: Reconnect the cables or power cords only after you reassemble the  
server and put the cover back on.  
9
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part (power  
backplane and AC box) that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside the  
power supplies, power backplane, and AC box. There are no  
serviceable parts inside the power supplies, power backplane, or AC  
box. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact an IBM  
service technician.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 41  
Handling Static-Sensitive Devices  
Handling Static-Sensitive Devices  
Static electricity, though harmless to you, can seriously damage server components  
or options.  
Note: When you are adding an internal option, do not open the static-protective  
package containing the option until you are instructed to do so.  
When you handle options and other server components, take these precautions to  
avoid damage from static electricity:  
Ÿ Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around  
you.  
Ÿ Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters and memory modules  
by the edges. Never touch any exposed circuitry.  
Ÿ Prevent others from touching components.  
Ÿ When you are installing a new option, touch the static-protective package  
containing the option to an unpainted metal surface on the server for at least  
two seconds. (This reduces static electricity from the package and from your  
body.)  
Ÿ When possible, remove the option and install it directly into the server without  
setting the option down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective  
package that the option comes in on a smooth, level surface and place the  
option on it.  
Ÿ Do not place the option on the server's covers or any metal surface.  
42 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Preparing to Install Options  
Preparing to Install Options  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Be sure your current server configuration is working properly.  
Ÿ Locate the key to the cover lock, if any.  
Ÿ Obtain a small, flat-blade screwdriver.  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ If you are preparing a rack model, you might want to install it in the rack  
first before installing options. See Chapter 5, “Installing a Server in a Rack  
Enclosure” on page 93 for instructions on installing your rack model.  
1. Unlock and open the server door, if any. For convenience during these  
procedures, you might prefer to remove the door completely.  
a. Locate the flange on the top edge of the front door, near the hinge.  
b. Press the flange downward while pressing out on the door; then, lift the  
door off the hinge. Set the door aside.  
8
CAUTION:  
When unlocked, the server door will not support the weight of the  
server. To avoid personal injury, be sure to remove or lock the  
server door before moving or lifting the server.  
2. Remove any media (diskettes or CDs) from the drives, and then turn off all  
attached devices and the server.  
3. If you have a tower model, continue with “Preparing a Tower Model” on  
page 44.  
If you have a rack model installed in a rack enclosure, go to “Preparing a Rack  
Model” on page 46.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 43  
Preparing to Install Options  
Preparing a Tower Model  
The hard disk drives in Netfinity 5000 server are hot-swappable. If you are  
installing only a hard disk drive (bays 1 through 5), go directly to “Installing or  
Removing Internal Drives” on page 56. Otherwise, continue with the following  
steps.  
1. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the server, disconnect the  
telephone line from the wall outlet and the server.  
Note: If you are in the United Kingdom, you must perform this step before  
disconnecting the power cord.  
6
CAUTION:  
The Power-on switch on the front of the server does not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the server. The server also might  
have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the server, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from  
the power source.  
2. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical outlets, and then disconnect all  
other cables from the back of the server.  
3. Open the server door, if you have not already done so.  
4. Remove the left-side cover.  
a. Locate the cover-release lever on the front of the server and slide it to the  
right.  
Cover  
Release  
Lever  
b. Slide the left-side cover back about 25 mm (1 inch); then, lift the cover and  
remove it.  
c. Store the cover in a safe place.  
44 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Preparing to Install Options  
5. If you are installing or removing a drive in bays A to C, remove the front bezel.  
a. Locate the blue bezel release lever on the left side of the server in the top  
front corner.  
Bezel Release Lever  
b. Move the lever upward following the curve of the lever opening.  
c. Lift the bezel tabs out of the slots at the bottom and pull the bezel out from  
the server front.  
6. Install (or remove) the desired options.  
Option  
Go To:  
Adapters  
“Working with Adapters” on page 49  
“Working with Memory Modules” on page 54  
“Installing or Removing Internal Drives” on page 56  
“Installing Microprocessors” on page 66  
“Installing or Replacing the Power Supply” on  
page 71  
Memory modules  
Internal drives  
Microprocessors  
Power supply  
External options  
Security options  
“Connecting External Options” on page 72  
“Adding Security” on page 74  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 45  
Preparing to Install Options  
Preparing a Rack Model  
Before you begin  
Read the documentation that comes with the rack enclosure for additional  
safety and operating information.  
The hard disk drives in Netfinity 5000 server are hot-swappable. If you are  
installing only a hard disk drive (bays 1 through 5), go directly to “Installing or  
Removing Internal Drives” on page 56. Otherwise, continue with the following  
steps.  
1. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the server, disconnect the  
telephone line from the wall outlet and the server.  
Note: If you are in the United Kingdom, you must perform this step before  
disconnecting the power cord.  
6
CAUTION:  
The Power-on switch on the front of the server does not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the server. The server also might  
have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the server, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from  
the power source.  
2. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical outlets, and then disconnect all  
other cables from the back of the server.  
3. Remove the screws from the brackets on either side of the server, and set  
them aside.  
4. Pull the rack model out of the rack enclosure until both slide rails lock.  
Note: When the server is in the locked position, you can easily reach the  
cables on the back of the server.  
46 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Preparing to Install Options  
5. Remove the top cover.  
a. Locate the captive thumbscrew .1/ on the back of the cover and turn it to  
release the cover.  
b. Slide the cover back about 25 mm (1 inch); then, lift the cover and remove  
it.  
c. Set the cover aside in a safe place.  
a. If you are installing or removing a drive in bays A to C, remove the front  
bezel.  
1) Locate the blue bezel release lever on the top of the server, in the right  
front corner.  
2) Move the lever toward the right, following the curve of the lever  
opening.  
Bezel Release Lever  
3) Lift the bezel tabs out of the slots at the left and pull the bezel away  
from the server front.  
b. If necessary, remove the server from the rack enclosure before installing  
options. For more information about removing the server from the rack  
enclosure, see “Removing the Rack Model from a Rack Enclosure” on  
page 104.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 47  
Preparing to Install Options  
6. Install (or remove) the desired options.  
Option  
Go To:  
Adapters  
“Working with Adapters” on page 49  
“Working with Memory Modules” on page 54  
“Installing or Removing Internal Drives” on page 56  
“Installing Microprocessors” on page 66  
“Installing or Replacing the Power Supply” on  
page 71  
Memory modules  
Internal drives  
Microprocessors  
Power supply  
External options  
Security options  
“Connecting External Options” on page 72  
“Adding Security” on page 74  
48 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Working with Adapters  
Working with Adapters  
Adding an adapter, such as a communication adapter, extends the capabilities and  
power of your server. For example, you can add a RAID (redundant array of  
independent disks) adapter that can enhance logical-drive capacity and  
performance.  
Adapter Considerations  
Your Netfinity 5000 server supports ISA and PCI adapters. You can install up to  
five adapters in the connectors on the system board.  
The system board in your server contains 16-bit, ISA-bus expansion connectors  
and 32-bit, PCI-bus expansion connectors. Two of the expansion slots are shared  
PCI/ISA slots. The remaining slots support only PCI adapters. Your server  
supports only 5.0-volt adapters on the PCI bus.  
Notes:  
1. You can install PCI adapters in slots 1–5. Slots 1–4 are on PCI bus 1, slot 5 is  
on PCI bus 0. Both PCI buses are primary buses; when the system scans the  
buses to see what devices are on them, it scans PCI bus 0 first.  
2. You can install ISA adapters in the shared slots 1 and 2.  
Note: If an ISA adapter is not a Plug and Play device, you must allocate the  
system resources that the adapter will use. Use the Plug and Play  
choice in the Advanced Setup selection of the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program to allocate resources.  
The following figure shows the location of the PCI and ISA expansion slot  
connectors on the system board.  
PCI  
PCI  
PCI  
PCI  
5
4
3
ISA  
PCI  
ISA  
2
1
Note: Expansion slots 1 and 2 are shared slots. Shared slots can be used by an  
adapter installed in either the PCI connector or the adjacent ISA connector,  
but not both.  
Your server comes with a video controller. This video controller is an integrated  
component on the system board. It is not in an expansion slot. The integrated  
video controller has super video graphics array (SVGA) technology.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 49  
Working with Adapters  
The integrated video controller is not removable. If you want to disable this  
controller and use a video adapter instead, you can install a video adapter in an  
expansion slot. When you install a video adapter, the server BIOS automatically  
disables the integrated video controller.  
Attention:  
To avoid possible damage to adapters and server components, be sure that the  
adapters you install do not touch each other or the other components (such as the  
microprocessor) inside the server.  
Installing or Removing Adapters  
This section gives the procedure for installing an adapter. If you want to remove an  
adapter, reverse the following steps.  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
1. Review the instructions that come with the adapter to determine if the adapter  
must be installed in a certain slot; otherwise, use any available, bus-compatible  
slot.  
Note: If you install a video adapter, the server automatically disables the video  
controller on the system board.  
2. If you have not done so, remove the server cover. See “Preparing to Install  
Options” on page 43.  
3. Remove the expansion-slot cover.  
a. Release the slot retaining clamp by pulling the curved arm on the clamp  
away from the system board.  
Note: The slot retaining clamp might differ slightly from this illustration.  
b. Remove the expansion slot cover from the slot opening.  
4. If the adapter is a full-length card, continue with this step. Otherwise, go to  
step 5 on page 52.  
a. Remove the card support bracket retaining clip.  
50 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Working with Adapters  
b. If the adapter is a full length card in slot 1 or 2, ensure that the card  
support bracket has the appropriate card support installed for that slot.  
Card Type  
ISA  
PCI  
Card Support Color  
Black  
White  
Each card support is also identified on the tab as ISA or PCI.  
Note: You might find it easier to replace the card support with the  
appropriate color card support if you remove the card support  
bracket from the server first.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 51  
Working with Adapters  
1) To remove a card support from a slot .1/ or storage location .2/,  
gently release the card support tab .3/ and slide the card support away  
from the system board until the card support is free.  
2) To insert a card support in a slot or a storage location, place the card  
support in the slot or storage opening and slide the card support toward  
the system board until the tab clicks into place.  
c. If you removed the card support bracket from the server, replace it in the  
server now.  
5. Touch the static-protective package to any unpainted metal surface on the  
server; then, remove the adapter from the package.  
6. Install the adapter:  
a. Carefully grasp the adapter and align it with the expansion slot (and with  
the card support bracket if a full-length adapter).  
b. Press the adapter firmly into the connector until fully seated.  
52 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Working with Adapters  
c. Fit the foot of the slot retaining clamp to the top of the expansion slot.  
d. Push the curved arm of the slot retaining clamp toward the adapter until the  
clamp is locked into place.  
e. If necessary, connect any internal cables to the adapter. Refer to the  
documentation that comes with the option.  
f. If you removed the card-guide retaining clip in step 4a on page 50, reinstall  
it now.  
7. If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 53  
Working with Memory Modules  
Working with Memory Modules  
Adding system memory to your server is an easy way to make programs run faster.  
You can increase the amount of system memory by installing options called  
memory modules. The server uses a noninterleaved memory configuration, with  
error correcting code (ECC) data protection.  
Notes:  
1. Your server comes with one or more dual-inline memory modules (DIMM)s  
installed.  
2. The server supports 100 MHz, 64 MB, 128 MB, and 256 MB DIMMs.  
3. Install only registered SDRAM ECC DIMMs.  
4. When you are installing memory modules, you might find it more efficient to  
install them in adjacent connectors, with no vacant memory connectors in  
between. For example, if your server only has one DIMM installed in memory  
connector J15, install additional memory in the J16 memory connector; then,  
continue with connectors J17 and J22.  
5. If you are installing DIMMs of different sizes, you might find it more efficient to  
install DIMMs with the greater memory capacity starting with connector J15.  
For example, when installing two 256 MB DIMMs, install the DIMMs in memory  
connectors J15 and J16.  
6. After installing or removing a DIMM, you must save the new configuration  
information using the Configuration/Setup Utility program. See “Using the  
Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
Installing or Removing Memory Modules  
This section gives the procedure for installing memory modules. If you want to  
remove a memory module, reverse the following steps.  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
1. If you have not done so, remove the server cover. See “Preparing to Install  
Options” on page 43.  
2. Locate the memory-module connectors on the system board (see “System  
Board Connectors” on page 169).  
Notes:  
a. Each connector slot contains two keys (dividers), which are used to assure  
that a memory-module can be installed only in the correct position.  
b. A retaining clip at each end of the connector locks the memory module into  
place.  
3. Press the retaining clips at the ends of the connector downward to the open  
position.  
54 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Working with Memory Modules  
4. Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the memory module from the  
package.  
5. Position the DIMM so that the two key slots (openings in the connector pins) on  
the bottom edge align with the corresponding sections in the connector.  
6. After aligning the DIMM, push the DIMM firmly straight down into the connector.  
(The retaining clips on both sides of the connector automatically come up into  
the notches on the sides of the DIMM when the DIMM is properly seated.)  
Notch  
Note: Adding or removing DIMMs changes the configuration information in the  
server. When you restart the server, the system displays POST error  
164. Select Continue; then, in the Configuration/Setup Utility program,  
select Save Settings.  
7. If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 55  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
Drives are devices that your server uses to store and retrieve data. You can add  
drives to your server to increase storage capacity and to enable your server to read  
other types of media.  
Location of Bays  
Internal drives are installed in bays. The bays are referred to as bay A, bay B,  
bay C, bay 1, bay 2, and so on.  
The following illustrations show the locations of the bays in your server.  
A
B
Tower model  
C
1
2
3
4
5
Rack model  
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
C
Your server comes with a CD-ROM drive installed in bay B and a diskette drive  
installed in bay C.  
56 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
Bay  
Drive Width  
Drive Type  
Drive Height  
A
5.25-inch  
Removable media  
drive only  
41.3 mm (1.6 in.)  
1
B
C
5.25-inch  
3.5-inch  
3.5-inch  
CD-ROM  
41.3 mm (1.6 in.)  
Diskette drive  
Hot-swap hard disk  
25.4 mm (1.0 in.)  
1
25.4 mm (1.0 in.) – Slim line (SL)  
through  
5
2
41.3 mm (1.6 in.) – Half height (HH)  
Notes:  
1. Removable media includes CD-ROMs, optical discs, and tapes. It does not include hard disk  
drives.  
2. A 41.3 mm drive installed in bays 1 through 5 will occupy two bays.  
Table 1. Maximum Allowable Drive Sizes  
Types of Cables  
Drives connect to your server with cables. Each cable connector is designed to fit  
a corresponding connector on a drive.  
Three types of internal cables connect to the drives in your server:  
Ÿ A four-wire power cable connects to each drive.  
Ÿ A flat-ribbon signal cable connects to IDE devices.  
– One flat-ribbon cable connects the internal diskette drive.  
The connector on one end of this cable attaches to the system board. The  
primary diskette drive installed in your server (usually known as drive A) is  
attached to the connector on the other end of this cable.  
Note: The primary diskette drive must always be attached to the drive  
connector on the end of this cable.  
– A second flat-ribbon cable connects the CD-ROM drive.  
This cable has two drive connectors. A third connector attaches to the  
system board. The CD-ROM drive that comes with your server is attached  
to the connector on the end of this cable.  
Ÿ Another cable connects internal SCSI devices. This SCSI cable has two  
connectors that connect to SCSI devices:  
– One to the backplane of the DASD hot-swap enclosure  
– One to a SCSI device you install in the open 5.25-inch bay  
A third connector attaches to the SCSI connector on the system board.  
External SCSI devices usually come with a SCSI cable. You attach one end of this  
SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the back of the server, and the other end to  
the SCSI device. You usually can attach additional SCSI devices to this cable.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 57  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
SCSI Devices  
Your Netfinity 5000 server supports drives that comply with American National  
Standards Institute (ANSI) SCSI Standards X3.131-1986 (SCSI), X3.131-1994,  
(SCSI-2), X3.277-1996 (SCSI-3 Fast-20 parallel interface), and X3.253-1995  
(SCSI-3 parallel interface).  
For a complete list of the SCSI devices supported on your Netfinity 5000 server, go  
to http://www.pc.ibm.com/support/ on the World Wide Web.  
If you install additional SCSI devices, you must set a unique identification (ID) for  
each SCSI device. This enables the SCSI controller to identify the devices and  
ensure that different devices do not attempt to transfer data at the same time.  
Note: Any information about SCSI drives also applies to other SCSI devices, such  
as scanners and printers.  
SCSI IDs  
If you install SCSI devices, you must set a unique identification (ID) for each SCSI  
device that you connect to your server. This enables the SCSI controller to identify  
the devices and ensure that different devices do not attempt to transfer data at the  
same time.  
The SCSI controller in your server supports SCSI IDs 0 to 15; ID 7 is reserved for  
the controller, ID 14 is reserved for the daughterboard (SAF-TE) on the DASD  
backplane. Use the SCSISelect Utility program to view the SCSI IDs of SCSI  
devices in your server. (See “Using the SCSISelect Utility Program” on page 35  
for more information.)  
Note: A daughterboard is a secondary adapter that can be plugged into another  
adapter or the system board. The SAF-TE daughterboard on the DASD  
backplane makes available the status information about the DASD drives  
that meet the following conditions:  
Ÿ The drives are part of a RAID environment  
Ÿ The status information comes from a supported IBM RAID adapter  
If you install wide (16-bit) SCSI devices, you can set the IDs to any whole number  
between 0 and 6, or to any whole number between 8 and 13, or to 15. If you  
install narrow (8-bit) SCSI devices, you can set the IDs to any whole number  
between 0 and 6.  
Your server automatically sets SCSI IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives, according to  
the jumper settings on the DASD backplane. Your server uses the hard disk drive  
SCSI IDs to send status information to the indicator lights on each hard disk drive.  
See “Status Indicators” on page 9 for the location and identification of the hard disk  
drive status lights.  
Table 2 shows the default SCSI IDs that the backplane assigns for hot-swap hard  
disk drives.  
Table 2. Automatically Assigned SCSI IDs  
Bay  
ID  
1
0
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
58 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
You can change the default ID addresses of the drives by changing the jumper  
settings on the DASD backplane. See “SCSI Jumpers” on page 173.  
Termination Requirements  
The UltraSCSI controller and the backplane of the hot-swap bays provide  
termination for the internal SCSI bus (cable) in your server. There are no  
termination requirements for any SCSI devices you install in the hard disk drive  
bays or attach to this cable.  
If you attach a SCSI cable and devices to the external SCSI connector, set the  
termination for the last device on that SCSI cable to Enabled. Refer to the  
instructions that come with the SCSI device for more information about termination.  
Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)  
Before you begin, be sure you have:  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
Ÿ Read “Termination Requirements.”  
Ÿ Verified that you have all cables, drive trays, and any other equipment  
specified in the documentation that comes with the internal drive.  
Before you can install drives in your Netfinity 5000, you might need to perform  
certain preinstallation activities. Some of the steps are required only during the  
initial installation of an option.  
1. Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive. (Refer to Table 1 on  
page 57 for the drive types and sizes available for each bay.)  
A
B
C
Tower model  
1
2
3
4
5
Chapter 4. Installing Options 59  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
Rack model  
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
C
2. Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to any unpainted metal  
surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the bag.  
3. Check the instructions that come with the drive, or contact your IBM reseller or  
IBM marketing representative to see if you need to set any switches or jumpers  
on the drive, or if you need to attach a tray to the drive.  
What to do next  
Ÿ To install a removable-media drive, go to “Installing or Removing Drives in  
Bays A and B (Removable Media).”  
Ÿ To install a diskette drive, go to “Installing or Removing a Drive in Bay C  
(Diskette Drive)” on page 62.  
Ÿ To install a hard disk drive, go to “Installing or Removing Drives in Bays 1  
through 5 (Hard Disk Drives)” on page 63.  
Installing or Removing Drives in Bays A and B (Removable Media)  
This section gives the procedure for installing a removable-media drive. If you want  
to remove a drive, reverse the following steps.  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Read “Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)” on page 59 and the instructions that  
come with the option.  
Ÿ Read “Termination Requirements” on page 59  
1. If you have not done so already, remove the server cover and the front bezel.  
See “Preparing to Install Options” on page 43.  
60 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
2. Remove the bay cover plate, if present.  
a. Remove the screws on either side of the cover plate that secure the plate  
to the target bay.  
b. Remove the cover plate from the server front panel. (Save the cover plate  
for future use.)  
3. Using the instructions that come with the drive, together with these instructions,  
check that any switches or jumpers on the drive are set correctly. Change the  
settings if necessary. For information about termination requirements, see  
“Termination Requirements” on page 59.  
4. Position the drive with the connectors facing the rear of the server.  
5. Slide the drive into the bay until it stops.  
6. Reinstall and tighten the screws that you removed in step 2.  
7. Connect the drive to the available connector on the SCSI cable or the IDE  
cable, as appropriate.  
Note: If you have difficulty connecting a cable, turn the cable connector over  
and try again; cable connectors are keyed to connect only one way.  
8. Connect one of the 4-pin power cables to the drive.  
9. If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 61  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
Installing or Removing a Drive in Bay C (Diskette Drive)  
This section gives the procedure for installing or removing a diskette drive.  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
To remove a drive in bay C:  
1. Locate the drive-release tab on the diskette drive.  
2. Press the tab against the drive and hold it there while pulling the drive out.  
3. Disconnect the diskette drive cable and power cable from the drive.  
4. If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
To install a drive in bay C:  
1. If you have not done so, remove the server cover and front bezel. See  
“Preparing to Install Options” on page 43.  
2. Using the instructions that come with the drive, together with these instructions,  
check that any switches or jumpers on the drive are set correctly. Change the  
settings if necessary. For information about termination requirements, see  
“Termination Requirements” on page 59.  
3. Insert the drive into the bay.  
a. Position the drive so that the connectors face the rear of the server and the  
diskette eject button is toward the outside of the server.  
b. Connect the diskette drive cable and power cable to the drive.  
Note: If you have difficulty connecting a cable, turn the cable connector  
over and try again; cable connectors are keyed to connect only one  
way.  
62 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
c. Locate the drive-release tab on the diskette drive.  
d. Press the tab against the drive and hold it there; slide the drive into the bay  
until it clicks into place.  
4. If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
Installing or Removing Drives in Bays 1 through 5 (Hard Disk Drives)  
This section gives the procedure for installing a hard disk drive. If you want to  
remove a drive, reverse the following steps.  
Note: To minimize the possibility of damage to the hard disk drives when you are  
installing a hard disk drive in a rack model, install the rack model in the rack  
before installing the hard disk drives.  
Attention: To avoid damage to a hard disk drive, do not remove the drive from  
the hot-swap bay until it has had time to spin down (approximately 30 seconds).  
Handle the drive gently.  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Read “Termination Requirements” on page 59  
Your Netfinity 5000 server contains hardware that lets you replace a hard disk drive  
without turning off the Netfinity 5000 server. These drives are known as  
hot-swappable or hot-swap drives.  
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must have a hot-swap-drive tray  
attached. The drive must have a single connector attachment (SCA) connector.  
Hot-swap drives come with the hot-swap-drive tray attached.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 63  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
Notes:  
1. The Netfinity 5000 server EMI integrity and cooling are both protected by  
having the hot-swap bays covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save  
the filler panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not  
replace it with another.  
2. The hot-swap bays connect to a SCSI backplane. This backplane is the  
printed circuit board behind the hot-swap bays.  
To install a drive in a hot-swap bay:  
1. Remove the filler panel .1/ from one of the empty hot-swap bays by inserting  
your finger into the depression at the top of the filler panel (tower model) or left  
side of the filler panel (rack model) and pulling it away from the server.  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the Netfinity  
5000 server for more than two minutes without either a drive or a filler panel  
installed for each bay.  
.1/ Filler panel  
.2/ Drive  
.3/ Tray handle  
2. Install the hard disk drive .2/ in the hot-swap bay.  
a. Ensure the tray handle .3/ is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).  
b. Align the drive-tray assembly so that it engages the guide rails in the bay.  
c. Gently push the drive-tray assembly into the bay until the drive connects to  
the backplane.  
d. Push the tray handle toward the drive until the handle locks.  
64 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing or Removing Internal Drives  
3. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify that the hard disk drives  
are operating properly. See “Status Indicators” on page 9 for details.  
Notes:  
a. There are no termination requirements for any SCSI hard disk drives  
installed in the hard drive bays. Termination is achieved through the DASD  
backplane.  
b. If your Netfinity 5000 server has a RAID adapter or controller, you might  
want to reconfigure your disk arrays after installing hard disk drives; consult  
the documentation that came with your adapter or controller. Record the  
configuration information in the appropriate tables in “Installed Device  
Records” on page 163.  
4. If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 65  
Installing Microprocessors  
Installing Microprocessors  
When you install an additional microprocessor, your Netfinity 5000 server can  
operate as a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server. With SMP, certain operating  
systems and application programs can distribute the processing load between  
microprocessors. This enhances performance for database and point-of-sale  
applications, integrated manufacturing solutions, and other applications.  
Installing Microprocessor Upgrades  
Your server comes with an Intel Pentium II microprocessor. This microprocessor  
incorporates MMX technology with built-in ECC level two (L2) cache. For the latest  
information about microprocessor upgrades available for your server, contact your  
IBM reseller, IBM marketing representative, or see  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/compat/ on the World Wide Web. If you do upgrade the  
microprocessor, use the instructions that come with the upgrade along with the  
instructions in “Installing or Replacing a Microprocessor” on page 67.  
Attention:  
Ÿ If you install an additional microprocessor that is different from the currently  
installed microprocessor, your server operation might be unreliable. To prevent  
this, use a microprocessor with the same internal and external clock speed,  
and the same cache size and voltage requirements as those of the currently  
installed microprocessor. Microprocessor internal and external clock  
frequencies and cache size must be identical.  
Ÿ The voltage-regulator module (VRM) for the additional microprocessor plugs  
into a connector on the system board (see “System Board Connectors” on  
page 169 for the location of the VRM connector). Because each  
microprocessor has specific power and voltage requirements, be sure to use  
the VRM that comes with the microprocessor.  
Note: The voltage regulator function for the microprocessor that is shipped  
with your server is built into the system board.  
Ÿ If you select a setting for the frequency switch that is greater than the actual  
frequency of the microprocessor, you might damage the microprocessor. The  
frequency switch settings are shown in Table 3 on page 70.  
For additional information about microprocessor speeds, clock frequencies, and  
jumper settings, see Chapter 7, “Server Records and Specifications” on page 161.  
66 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing Microprocessors  
Installing or Replacing a Microprocessor  
This section gives the procedure for installing microprocessors. If you want to  
remove a microprocessor, reverse the order of the following steps.  
Before you begin:  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Thoroughly review the documentation that comes with the microprocessor,  
so that you can determine whether you need to update the server BIOS.  
The “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information” section of this Server  
Library includes IBM Update Connector, which keeps your BIOS and device  
drivers current. You can also obtain the latest level of BIOS for your server  
through the World Wide Web and the IBM Personal Computer Company  
Bulletin Board System (BBS). See the “Getting Help Information” section of  
this Server Library for the appropriate World Wide Web addresses and  
bulletin board telephone numbers.  
Ÿ For a list of supported operating systems, see  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/compat/ on the World Wide Web.  
Notes:  
1. If you have not already done so, go to http://www.pc.ibm.com/support/ on the  
World Wide Web and download the appropriate flash update program. Review  
the applicable README files, and use this information to create a Flash Utility  
Diskette. Perform the POST/BIOS (flash) update procedure.  
2. The microprocessor in your server comes with an attached heat sink. The  
microprocessor plugs into the microprocessor socket on the system board and  
is stabilized with a plastic bracket attached to the system board.  
3. If you replace the microprocessor with one that has a different speed, you must  
change the switch settings on the system board. To locate the switches, see  
“System Board Connectors” on page 169. For information about the  
appropriate switch settings, see Table 17 on page 170, or see the label inside  
the server cover.  
Attention:  
If you select a setting for the frequency switch that is greater than the actual  
frequency of the microprocessor, you might damage the microprocessor.  
To install a microprocessor:  
1. If you have not done so, remove the server cover. See “Preparing to Install  
Options” on page 43.  
2. If you are installing an additional microprocessor, remove the terminator card  
from the secondary microprocessor connector. Otherwise, go to step 3 on  
page 68.  
a. Spread apart the posts of the secondary microprocessor connector bracket  
until the top of the terminator card is past the restraining latches.  
b. Lift the terminator card out of the connector.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 67  
Installing Microprocessors  
Note: When you install a second microprocessor, it becomes the startup  
(boot) microprocessor.  
3. Carefully remove the microprocessor from the static-protective package.  
4. If you are replacing a microprocessor, remove the existing microprocessor from  
its socket. Otherwise, go to step 5.  
a. Locate the microprocessor socket on the system board. (See the  
illustration in “System Board Illustration” on page 168.)  
b. Place your index fingers on the small retainer tabs on the top of the  
microprocessor. Push in toward the microprocessor until the tabs release.  
Note: The illustrations in this section might differ slightly from your  
hardware.  
Tabs  
c. Lift the microprocessor out of the connector.  
d. Store the old microprocessor in a static-protective package.  
5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new microprocessor to  
any unpainted metal surface in the server; then, remove the new  
microprocessor.  
68 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing Microprocessors  
6. Press inward on the retainer tabs until they click into place.  
Note: For the location of the retainer tabs, see the illustration in step 4b on  
page 68.  
7. Align the new microprocessor with the microprocessor connector on the system  
board and slide it into the guides. Press the microprocessor down until it snaps  
into place and is fully seated in the connector.  
8. Pull outward on the retainer tabs.  
9. If you replaced the microprocessor with one that has a different speed, you  
must change the switch settings on the system board. To locate the switches,  
see “System Board Connectors” on page 169.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 69  
Installing Microprocessors  
Table 3. Switch Settings for Microprocessor Speed  
350 MHz  
400 MHz  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
450 MHz  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
ON  
OFF  
10. Go to “Record the Identification Numbers” on page 162 and Table 14 on  
page 164, and update the microprocessor information; then, return here.  
11. Because you installed a new microprocessor in your server, you must  
reconfigure your server. Follow the procedure described in “Using the  
Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
12. Because you installed a new microprocessor in your server, you might need to  
make changes to your operating system.  
Ÿ If your operating system does not support SMP, install one of the SMP  
operating systems that your server supports. See  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/netfinity/ on the World Wide Web.  
Ÿ If your operating system does support SMP, refer to your operating-system  
documentation. You might need to make changes so that the operating  
system recognizes the new microprocessor.  
Ÿ On some operating systems, if you install a second microprocessor it might  
be necessary to reinstall the operating system. See the documentation that  
comes with the new microprocessor.  
13. If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
70 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing or Replacing the Power Supply  
Installing or Replacing the Power Supply  
Your Netfinity server is shipped with a 350-watt power supply that provides  
redundant power through the use of two internal power modules. If your server  
load does not exceed 175 watts, and a problem occurs with one of the power  
modules in the power supply, the other module takes over the load. For power  
loads above 175 watts, you can install a second, optional, power supply to provide  
redundant power for the server. The second power supply contains one 175-watt  
power module. With the optional second power supply installed, if a problem  
occurs with any of the power modules, the remaining two power modules supply  
the needed 350 watts of power.  
The LEDs on the back of each power supply indicate the status of each of the  
power modules. If an LED is not on, there is a problem with the power supply  
module, and the power supply must be replaced.  
Ÿ To install or remove the optional second power supply, see the instructions that  
come with the option.  
Ÿ To replace the 350-watt power supply, contact an IBM service technician to  
have the system serviced.  
If you want to install or remove any other options, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
“Completing the Installation” on page 76.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 71  
Connecting External Options  
Connecting External Options  
The information in this section supplements the instructions that come with the  
external options (SCSI drives, printers, modems, and other serial and parallel  
devices). To connect external options, see the documentation that comes with the  
options.  
Adding External SCSI Devices  
Your server comes with a 16-bit UltraSCSI controller on the system board, which  
provides two independent SCSI channels. This controller has two 68-pin, shielded,  
high-density connectors: one internal, on the controller, and one external, on the  
back of the server. You can use these connectors to install an additional internal  
SCSI device in your server or to attach up to fifteen external SCSI devices to your  
server.  
The internal SCSI connector provides support for SCSI devices installed inside the  
server. The external SCSI connector provides support for external SCSI devices.  
Notes:  
1. If you plan to install both internal and external SCSI devices, you must follow  
the instructions given in “Installing or Removing Internal Drives” on page 56 in  
addition to the instructions in this section. Read “Installing or Removing  
Internal Drives,” and then return here.  
For additional information about SCSI configurations supported, see  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/netfinity/  
2. Do not exceed the following cable lengths:  
Ÿ If you connect one or more Fast SCSI devices to the SCSI controller, the  
total length of all cables (internal and external) must not exceed 3 meters  
(9.8 feet).  
Ÿ If you do not connect Fast SCSI devices to the SCSI controller, the total  
length of all cables must not exceed 6 meters (19.7 feet).  
You must set a unique SCSI ID for each external SCSI device so that the controller  
can identify the devices. The controller can then ensure that different devices do  
not attempt to transfer data at the same time. Therefore, do not set the SCSI IDs  
for external devices to the values you used for the controller.  
If you plan to attach an external SCSI device, you might need to order an additional  
SCSI cable. To use an external device with the Netfinity 5000 server, you must  
connect it to the external SCSI connector, using a SCSI cable. This SCSI cable  
must have the proper connector for the SCSI external connector on one end, and  
the proper connector for the external device on the other end. If a SCSI cable  
does not come with the external device, or if it is the wrong type, you will need to  
order one. To select and order the correct SCSI cable for use with the external  
device, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.  
72 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Connecting External Options  
Attaching External Options  
To attach an external option:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.  
2. Follow the instructions that come with the option and the illustration in  
“Input/Output Connectors” on page 12 to connect it to the server.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 73  
Adding Security  
Adding Security  
You can add elements to your server to help to protect the server itself from theft  
and tampering, and to help to protect the data and programs stored in the server  
from unauthorized access and use.  
Installing a U-Bolt and Security Cable  
You can help to deter unauthorized removal of your tower model Netfinity 5000  
server by installing a U-bolt and security cable on the rear of your server.  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Obtain the following:  
– A U-bolt  
– A flat-blade screwdriver  
– An adjustable wrench  
– A 19 mm (3/4 in.) U-bolt or wire rope (similar to National Manufacturing  
No. 3230, Stock No. 176-735)  
– Threaded nuts that fit the U-bolt  
– A security cable  
– A lock, such as a combination lock or padlock  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
To install a U-bolt and security cable:  
1. Remove the server cover. See “Preparing to Install Options” on page 43.  
2. Insert the U-bolt through the holes and secure it in place with the nuts.  
74 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Adding Security  
3. If you have completed installing the U-bolt and do not want to install any other  
internal options, replace the server cover and reconnect all external cables and  
power cords (see “Completing the Installation” on page 76 if you need  
additional information).  
4. Thread the cable through the U-bolt and around an object that is not a part of  
or permanently secured to the building structure or foundation, and from which  
it cannot be removed; then, fasten the cable ends together with a lock.  
The following illustration shows an example of how this might work.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 75  
Completing the Installation  
Completing the Installation  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Complete all the installation procedures for the internal options you have  
chosen to install.  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41.  
Ÿ If you have a tower model, continue with “Completing the Tower Model  
Installation.”  
Ÿ If you have a rack model, go to “Completing the Rack Model Installation” on  
page 79.  
Completing the Tower Model Installation  
1. Install the cover on the server.  
a. Align the left-side cover with the left side of the server, about 25 mm (1  
inch) from the front of the server; place the bottom of the left-side cover on  
the bottom rail of the left-side frame.  
b. Insert the tabs at the top of the cover into the slots at the top of the server  
side.  
c. Hold the cover against the server and slide the cover toward the front of  
the server until the cover clicks into place.  
Note: Be sure the front edge of the cover is flat against the server.  
76 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Completing the Installation  
2. Replace the bezel, if it was removed.  
a. Place the bezel tabs .1/ in the slots at the bottom front of the server.  
b. Press the top of the bezel toward the server front until the bezel clicks into  
place.  
3. Replace the server door, if it was removed.  
a. Set the door on the bottom hinge.  
b. Press the flange downward while pressing the top of the door toward the  
server, until the flange connects with the top hinge. Release the flange.  
4. Close and lock the server door.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 77  
Completing the Installation  
Attention:  
Be sure to maintain a clearance of at least 127 mm (5 inches) on the front and  
rear of the server to allow for air circulation.  
5. Reconnect the cables to the back of the server; then, plug the power cords into  
properly grounded electrical outlets.  
6. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the server, reconnect the  
telephone line to the wall outlet and the server.  
What to do next  
When you have completed installing the covers and cables, go to “Updating the  
Server Configuration” on page 82.  
78 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Completing the Installation  
Completing the Rack Model Installation  
1. Replace the top cover:  
a. Align the top cover with the top of the server, about 25 mm (1 inch) from  
the front of the server.  
b. Hold the cover against the server and slide the cover toward the front of  
the server until the cover clicks into place.  
Note: Be sure the front edge of the cover is flat against the server.  
c. Turn the captive thumbscrew .1/ until the cover is secured.  
2. Replace the bezel, if it was removed.  
a. Place the bezel tabs .2/ in the slots at the left front of the server.  
b. Press the right end of the bezel toward the server front until the bezel clicks  
into place.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 79  
Completing the Installation  
3. Attach the monitor, keyboard, and power cables to the corresponding  
connectors on the server. Refer to the rack documentation for instructions.  
80 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Completing the Installation  
4. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the server, reconnect the  
telephone line to the wall outlet and the server.  
5
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)  
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your machine.  
5. If you are installing the rack model in the rack for the first time, go to “Installing  
the Server in the Rack Enclosure” on page 102, and then go to “Updating the  
Server Configuration” on page 82. Otherwise, continue with the following  
instructions to secure the rack model in the rack.  
a. Slide the rack model into the rack.  
b. Locate the screws that you removed in step 3 on page 46.  
c. Insert the screws through the bracket, mounting rail, and cage nut.  
What to do next  
When you have completed installing the cover and cables, go to “Updating the  
Server Configuration” on page 82.  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 81  
Updating the Server Configuration  
Updating the Server Configuration  
When you start your server for the first time after you add or remove an internal  
option or an external small computer systems interface (SCSI) device, you might  
see a message telling you the configuration has changed. You might need to  
install device drivers (required only if the option has a device driver). Refer to the  
documentation that comes with your option for information about installing any  
required device drivers.  
Notes:  
1. If you remove the last (terminated) SCSI device from the external SCSI cable  
connected to the SCSI connector on the back of the server, the server might  
not recognize any SCSI devices that are still connected on that SCSI channel  
(cable). See Chapter 6, “Solving Problems” for information on correcting this  
situation.  
2. When a hard disk drive is added and you want to include it in your startup  
sequence, use the Start Options selection of the Configuration/Setup Utility  
programs (see “Start Options” on page 28).  
3. When you install an ISA legacy adapter, you must allocate system resources to  
support it (see “Plug and Play” on page 30).  
4. You can find the list of supported hardware and software for your server at  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/compat on the World Wide Web.  
Record the new configuration information in Chapter 7, “Server Records and  
Specifications” on page 161.  
What to do next  
Ÿ Device drivers to install? See the instructions that come with the option to  
determine if device drivers are required, and, if so, how to install them.  
Ÿ If you do not need to install any device drivers or update the system  
configuration, your server is ready to use.  
82 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Serial Port Connectors  
Serial ports are used to communicate with printers, plotters, external modems,  
auxiliary terminals, and other computers. Your server provides two serial ports (A  
and B), and a special type of serial port (Management Port C, described on the  
next page). You can add more serial ports by installing a serial adapter in one of  
the expansion slots.  
Note: Serial port A can be shared by the system-management processor and  
operating system. Serial port B is used by the operating system only.  
Management port C is controlled exclusively by the system-management  
processor, cannot be used by the operating system, and cannot be  
configured using the Configuration/Setup Utility program. See the  
“Advanced System Management Information” section of this Server Library  
for information about configuring serial ports A and C.  
Serial ports transfer data asynchronously; they can transmit any number of bits at  
any time, with no restriction on the duration of the pauses between characters.  
The serial ports transmit and receive data and commands at a rate of 300 bits per  
second (bps) up to 115200 bps. The bits-per-second measurement is commonly  
referred to as the baud rate.  
Each of the two serial connectors provided on your Netfinity 5000 server uses a  
9-pin, D-shell connector.  
5
1
6
9
Table 4 shows the pin-number assignments for the serial port connectors. The  
pin-number assignments conform to the industry standard.  
Table 4. Serial Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
Data carrier detect  
Receive data  
Transmit data  
Data terminal ready  
Signal ground  
6
7
8
9
Data set ready  
Request to send  
Clear to send  
Ring indicator  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 83  
Management Port C  
Your server has a dedicated systems management I/O port. This port can be used  
to attach a modem that is dedicated to communication with the  
system-management processor.  
The connector on the back of the server and the pin-number assignments are the  
same as for the serial ports.  
5
1
6
9
Table 4 on page 83 shows the pin-number assignments for the serial port  
connectors. The pin-number assignments conform to the industry standard.  
84 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Parallel Port Connector  
Parallel ports are used to communicate with printers and other devices, such as  
some CD-ROM and tape drives. Your server provides one 25-pin, D-shell  
connector on the back of the server.  
1
13  
25  
14  
This parallel port connector conforms to the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE) Standard 1284. There are three standard modes of operation:  
Ÿ Standard Parallel Port (SPP)  
Ÿ Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP)  
Ÿ Extended Capability Port (ECP)  
Table 5 shows the pin-number assignments for the parallel port connector. The  
signal names for all three modes are shown. SPP and ECP signal names are the  
same; EPP signal names that are different are shown in parentheses.  
Table 5. Parallel Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-STROBE (-WRITE)  
Data 0  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
-AUTO FD (-DSTRB)  
-ERROR  
-INIT  
-SLCT IN (-ASTRB)  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
-ACK  
BUSY (-WAIT)  
PE  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
SLCT  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 85  
Video Port Connector  
The video port is where you can attach a video monitor to your Netfinity 5000  
server. Your server provides a 15-pin video port connector.  
6
1
11  
5
15  
10  
Table 6 shows the pin-number assignments for the video port connector.  
Table 6. Video Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
1
Red  
2
3
Green or monochrome  
Blue  
4
Not connected  
5
Ground  
6
Red ground  
7
8
Green ground or monochrome ground  
Blue ground  
9
+5v (DDC power)  
Ground  
Not connected  
Display data channel (DDC data)  
Horizontal synchronization (Hsync)  
Vertical synchronization (Vsync)  
Display data channel (DDC clock)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
86 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Keyboard and Mouse Connectors  
Your server provides one keyboard port and one auxiliary-device port. An auxiliary  
device can be a mouse or other pointing device.  
6
4
5
3
1
2
Table 7 shows the pin-number assignments for the keyboard and auxiliary-device  
port connectors.  
Table 7. Keyboard and Auxiliary-Device Port Connectors Pin-Number Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Data  
Not connected  
Ground  
+5 V dc  
Clock  
Not connected  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 87  
SCSI Connectors  
Your server comes with a 16-bit UltraSCSI controller on the system board, which  
provides two independent SCSI channels. This controller has two 68-pin, shielded,  
high-density connectors: one internal, on the controller, and one external, on the  
back of the server. You can use these connectors to install an additional internal  
SCSI device in your server or to attach up to fifteen external SCSI devices to your  
server.  
Internal SCSI Connector  
A 2-drop, 68-pin (16-bit) cable is installed in your server. One drop is connected to  
the backplane, the other drop can connect to an additional SCSI removable media  
device (not a hard disk drive). This cable is connected to the internal connector for  
the 16-bit UltraSCSI controller. You can use this cable to install an additional  
internal SCSI device in your server.  
External SCSI Connector  
To attach an external SCSI device to your server, connect an external SCSI cable  
from the SCSI device to the SCSI connector on the back of the server. Ensure that  
the last device on the external SCSI cable is terminated.  
88 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Table 8 shows the pin-number assignments for the 68-pin SCSI connectors.  
Table 8. The 68-Pin SCSI Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Terminal power  
Terminal power  
Reserved  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Not connected  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
Data 12  
Data 13  
Data 14  
Data 15  
Data P1  
Data 0  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
Data P0  
Reserved  
-PRSN  
Terminal power  
Terminal power  
Reserved  
Ground  
-Attention  
Ground  
-Busy  
-Acknowledge  
-Reset  
-Message  
-Select  
-Control/Data  
-Request  
-Input/Output  
Data 8  
Data 9  
Data 10  
Data 11  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 89  
Universal Serial Bus Ports  
The universal serial bus (USB) is an emerging serial interface standard for  
telephony and multimedia devices. Each USB port is a single connector for  
devices that previously used serial, parallel, keyboard, mouse, and game ports.  
USB technology uses Plug and Play technology to determine which type of device  
has been attached to the connector. Each USB device is accessed by a unique  
USB address. A device called a hub is used to convert a single USB connector  
into multiple attachment points. A hub has multiple ports where peripherals can be  
attached. USB provides 12 megabits-per-second (Mbps) bandwidth with a  
maximum of 63 peripherals and a maximum signal distance of five meters (16 feet  
4.9 inches) per segment.  
Note: If more than one USB device is to be attached, the devices must be  
connected to a hub. Your Netfinity 5000 server does not support a  
keyboard attached to the system USB port.  
Your Netfinity 5000 server comes with two USB ports. Table 9 shows the  
pin-number assignments for the USB port connectors.  
Table 9. USB Port Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
VCC  
Data  
+Data  
Ground  
90 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Ethernet Connector  
The system board in your Netfinity 5000 server contains an Ethernet controller. The  
controller has an external RJ-45 connector on the rear of the server that is used  
with a category 3, 4, or 5 twisted-pair cable. The connector enables an Ethernet  
network to attach to the internal transceiver in your server.  
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that the cabling in the  
network be Category 5 or higher.  
See “Configuring the Ethernet Controller” on page 32 for additional information  
about the Ethernet controller.  
Table 10 shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45 connector. These  
assignments apply to both 10BASE-T and 100-BASETX devices.  
10BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX  
UTP Cable  
1
RJ-45 Modular Plug Connector  
2
3
Pins  
6
Table 10. Ethernet Connector Pin-Number Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
Transmit data+  
Transmit data−  
Receive data+  
Reserved  
5
6
7
8
Reserved  
Receive data−  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Chapter 4. Installing Options 91  
Installing the Server in a Rack Enclosure.  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure  
This chapter provides instructions for installing a Netfinity 5000 server rack model in  
a server rack enclosure.  
Ÿ If you have a rack model, your server comes with the necessary rack mounting  
hardware. Review the preinstallation information in “Before You Begin” on  
page 94; then, continue at “Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure” on  
page 96.  
Ÿ
If your Netfinity 5000 server is a tower model and you want to install it as a  
rack model in a server rack enclosure, you must order the Netfinity Rack Mount  
Kit. This kit contains the appropriate front, top, and bottom covers, in addition to  
the brackets and the cable-management arm that you need to install the server  
into the rack. Follow the instructions that are included in the Rack Mount Kit.  
This chapter contains:  
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Preparing the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Preparing the Rack Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Installing the Server in the Rack Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Removing the Rack Model from a Rack Enclosure  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
93  
Before You Begin  
Before You Begin  
Ÿ You will need the following items:  
– Flat-blade screwdriver  
– 8-inch adjustable wrench or pliers  
– Tape  
– Pencil  
Some of the installation procedures require two people.  
Ÿ Before you begin to install your server in the rack enclosure, review the safety  
and handling guidelines specified under “Safety Information Statements” on  
page vii, “Electrical Safety” on page 41, and “Handling Static-Sensitive  
Devices” on page 42. These guidelines will help you work safely while working  
with your server and options.  
Ÿ Review the documentation that comes with your rack enclosure for additional  
safety, cabling, and operating considerations.  
Ÿ To ensure cabinet stability, install the servers starting from the bottom of the  
rack enclosure.  
Note: If you are installing different server models in the rack enclosure, install  
the heaviest models in the lower part of the rack enclosure.  
Ÿ Ensure that you plan the rack enclosure installation within the guidelines for:  
– Heat generation  
– Electrical requirements  
– Air flow  
– Mechanical loading  
Ÿ Verify that the rack enclosure can meet the rack model operating parameters,  
as detailed in Table 11 on page 95.  
94 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Before You Begin  
Size  
Electrical Input  
Heat Output  
– Depth: 560 mm (22.05 in.)  
– Height: 230 mm (9.06 in.)  
– Width: 420 mm (16.54 in.)  
Ÿ Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz) is  
required  
Ÿ Approximate heat output in British  
Thermal Units (Btu) per hour:  
Ÿ Input voltage:  
– Minimum configuration:  
350 Btu (102 watts)  
– Low range:  
Weight  
– Maximum configuration:  
860 Btu (251 watts)  
- Minimum: 90 V ac  
- Maximum: 137 V ac  
– High range:  
Ÿ Typical server as shipped: 39 kg  
(85.8 lb)  
Acoustical Noise Emissions Values  
Environment  
Ÿ Sound power, idling  
Ÿ Air temperature:  
- Minimum: 180 V ac  
- Maximum: 265 V ac  
– 6.2 bel for open bay system  
(no hard disk drives installed)  
– Server on: 10° to 35° C  
(50° to 95° F)  
Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)  
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA)  
approximately:  
– 6.3 bel for system with one  
hard disk drive installed)  
– Server on: 10° to 32° C  
(50° to 90° F)  
Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to  
2133 m (7000 ft.)  
- Minimum configuration as  
shipped: 0.08 kVA  
- Maximum configuration:  
0.52 kVA  
Ÿ Sound power, operating  
– 6.2 bel for open bay system  
(no hard disk drives installed)  
– Server off: 10° to 43° C  
(50° to 110° F)  
– 6.3 bel for system with one  
hard disk drive installed)  
Total Power Available for Drives  
Ÿ Nominal Operating Current allowed:  
Maximum Altitude: 2133 m  
(7000 ft.)  
Ÿ Sound pressure, idling  
+5 V dc line: 5.3 A  
+12 V dc line: 5.0 A  
– 47 dBa for open bay system  
(no hard disk drives installed)  
Ÿ Humidity:  
– Server on: 8% to 80%  
– Server off: 8% to 80%  
– 48 dBa for system with one  
hard disk drive installed)  
Ÿ Maximum altitude: 2133 m  
Ÿ Sound pressure, operating  
(7000 ft)  
– 47 dBa for open bay system  
(no hard disk drives installed)  
– 48 dBa for system with one  
hard disk drive installed)  
Table 11. Netfinity 5000 Server Operating Specifications  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure 95  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
During this procedure, you must install parts on the rack enclosure and the server.  
This process can be divided into three parts:  
Ÿ Preparing the server  
Ÿ Preparing the rack enclosure  
Ÿ Installing the server into the rack enclosure  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42, and the safety information in your rack enclosure  
documentation.  
Ÿ Turn off the server, if it is on.  
Ÿ Refer to your rack enclosure documentation for additional information on  
preparing the rack.  
Preparing the Server  
In this section, you will use the following parts:  
Ÿ One cable arm bracket  
Ÿ The inner slide from two slide bracket assemblies  
Ÿ 6 pan-head short screws (M4 by 5 mm)  
5
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)  
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your machine.  
Attention:  
To avoid damage to internal components, use only the pan-head short screws (M4  
by 5 mm) included with the Rack Mount Kit.  
96 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
To prepare the Netfinity 5000 server for installation in a rack enclosure:  
1. Attach the cable-arm bracket to the rear of the server.  
a. Remove the two screws at the left of the primary power supply.  
b. Align the cable-arm bracket with the screw holes, keeping the solid arm of  
the bracket toward the side of the server. Make sure the openings in the  
bracket align with the power supply LEDs and the fan.  
c. Attach the bracket with the two screws you removed in step 1a.  
2. Attach the inner slide section of each slide rail to the side of the server.  
a. Pull the inner slide until the safety latch locks.  
b. Press the safety latch; then, pull the inner slide firmly until it detaches from  
the outer slide rail.  
c. Align the holes on the inner slide with the holes on sides of the server;  
then, attach the slide with three pan-head short screws (M4 by 5 mm).  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure 97  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
Preparing the Rack Enclosure  
In this section, you will use the following parts:  
Ÿ Two slide bracket assemblies  
Ÿ Two slide rails (fitted to system unit)  
Ÿ One cable-management arm  
Ÿ Ten long screws (M6 by 16 mm)  
Ÿ Ten cage nuts  
Ÿ Installation template  
Attention:  
To ensure cabinet stability, plan the installation of servers in the rack enclosure  
starting from the bottom.  
Note: This procedure requires two people.  
To attach the mounting hardware to the rack enclosure:  
1. Mark the positions of the slide brackets on the mounting rails on the rack  
enclosure.  
a. Position the template on the front mounting rail on the rack enclosure,  
aligning the holes. Secure the template in place with tape.  
b. Mark the holes for the slide brackets and cage nuts. If you prefer, mark all  
the cage nut positions on the rack at this time.  
c. Carefully remove the tape from the mounting rails, and attach the template  
to the rear mounting rails. Mark the locations for the slide brackets and  
cage nuts.  
Notes:  
a. You must align the slide brackets correctly, or the installation cannot be  
completed.  
b. The slide rails have four screws each to allow for length adjustment.  
2. Install the cage nuts in the marked positions as shown.  
3. Attach the slide rail to the left side of the rack enclosure.  
a. Extend the outer slide rail until the slide bracket is flush against the outside  
of the left front mounting rail. Align the slide rail with the cage nuts on the  
mounting rail.  
98 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
b. From the front of the rack enclosure, insert two long screws through the  
slide bracket and mounting rail. Press the slide bracket until it is flush with  
the outer edge of the mounting rail; then, tighten the screws.  
c. Attach the slide bracket to the left rear side of the rack enclosure.  
1) Align the holes on the slide bracket with the cage nuts on the rear  
mounting rail.  
2) From the rear of the rack enclosure, insert two long screws through the  
slide bracket and mounting rail; then, tighten the screws.  
3) If it was necessary to adjust the length of the slide rails, tighten the  
nuts on the slide rail, using pliers, a socket wrench, or an adjustable  
wrench.  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure 99  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
4. Attach the slide rail to the right side of the rack enclosure.  
a. Extend the outer slide rail until the slide bracket is flush against the outside  
of the right front mounting rail. Align the slide bracket with the cage nuts  
on the mounting rail.  
b. From the front of the rack enclosure, insert two long screws through the  
slide bracket and mounting rail. Press the slide rail so that it is flush with  
the outer edge of the mounting rail and tighten the screws.  
c. Attach the slide bracket to the right rear of the rack enclosure.  
1) Align the holes on the bracket with the cage nuts on the rear mounting  
rail.  
2) From the rear of the rack enclosure, insert a long screw through holes  
in the slide bracket and mounting rail; then, tighten the screws.  
5. Attach the cable-management arm to the right rear of the rack enclosure.  
a. Align the holes on the cable-management arm mounting panel with the  
cage nuts on the rear mounting rail.  
100 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
b. From the rear of the rack enclosure, insert a long screw through the holes  
in the cable-management arm mounting panel and cage nut; then, tighten  
the screws.  
Notes:  
1) You can choose to wait to attach the cable-management arm to the  
rack until after you have attached the other end of the  
cable-management arm to the server.  
2) To facilitate alignment of the cable-management arm, be sure to insert  
the screws through the first and fourth holes, as shown.  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure 101  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
Installing the Server in the Rack Enclosure  
In this section, you will use the following parts:  
Ÿ Four long screws (M6 by 16 mm)  
Ÿ Two cage nuts  
Ÿ One cable-management arm  
Ÿ Cable ties  
To install the server into the rack enclosure:  
1. If you have not done so already, install a cage nut in each front mounting rail in  
the marked positions, as shown.  
2. Position the Netfinity 5000 server horizontally, with the 3.5-inch drive bays on  
the top.  
3. Align the inner slides on the sides of the server with the slide rails; then, slide  
the server onto the outer slide, until the slide rails click into place.  
Note: When the rack model is fully extended, safety latches on the slide rails  
lock into place. This prevents the server from being accidentally pulled  
out too far and dropped. To release the safety latch, press in.  
4. Press the safety latches and slide the rack model about halfway into the rack  
enclosure.  
102 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installing the Rack Model in a Rack Enclosure  
5. Attach the cable-management arm to the cable-arm bracket, using two long  
(M6 by 16 mm) screws.  
6. If you have not done so already, attach the cable-management arm to the rack  
as described in steps 5a on page 100 and 5b on page 101.  
7. Attach the monitor, keyboard, and power cables to the corresponding  
connectors on the server. Refer to the rack enclosure documentation for  
instructions.  
8. Attach the cables to the cable-management arm using the cable ties provided.  
Note: Be sure to route the cables above the top edge or below the bottom  
edge of the cable-management arm, to avoid overstressing the cables.  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure 103  
Removing the Rack Model from a Rack Enclosure  
9. Secure the rack model in the rack enclosure.  
a. Slide the rack model into the rack enclosure.  
b. Secure the server to both sides of the rack enclosure by inserting a long  
screw (M6 by 16 mm) through the chassis bracket, mounting rail, and cage  
nut.  
10. To complete the installation, refer to the documentation that comes with the  
rack enclosure.  
Removing the Rack Model from a Rack Enclosure  
In some configurations, installing options in the rack model might be more  
convenient if you remove the server from the rack enclosure. For example, you  
might prefer to remove the server if you are installing an internal drive in a rack  
model that is installed in the bottom bay in a rack enclosure.  
Before you begin  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Turn off the server.  
Ÿ Follow any additional installation and safety instructions that come with the  
rack.  
5
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)  
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe lifting practices when lifting your machine.  
104 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Removing the Rack Model from a Rack Enclosure  
To remove the Netfinity 5000 server from a rack enclosure:  
1. Remove the screws from each front bracket. Set the screws aside for later  
use.  
2. Slide the server out of the rack.  
3. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the server, disconnect the  
telephone line from the wall outlet and the server.  
Note: If you are in the United Kingdom, you must perform this step before  
disconnecting the power cord.  
4. Disconnect all cables and power cords from the rear of the server.  
5. Remove the two screws from the cable-arm bracket.  
6. Press the safety release latch on each slide rail.  
7. Lift the server at a slight angle, and pull it from the slide rails. Then place the  
server on a flat, nonconductive surface.  
Chapter 5. Installing a Server in a Rack Enclosure 105  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems  
Server problems can be caused by the hardware, the software, or a user error. An  
example of a user error is pressing the wrong key on the keyboard.  
You can check the hardware by using the diagnostic test programs and the  
information in this chapter.  
Note: When you run the diagnostic test programs, a single problem can cause  
several error messages to occur. When this happens, work to correct the  
cause of the first error message. After the cause is corrected, the other  
error messages probably will not occur the next time you run the tests.  
If the hardware is OK and you have not made an error, you might have a software  
problem. If you suspect that you have a software problem, refer to the information  
that comes with that software package.  
This chapter contains:  
Diagnostic Tools Overview  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Diagnostic Test Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Power-On Self-Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
POST Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Option Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Diagnostic Test Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Navigating Through the Diagnostic Tests  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Running Diagnostic Test Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Viewing the Test Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Power-on Self Test (POST) Messages  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
POST Message Table  
Power-on Self-Test (POST) Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
POST Beep Code Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
POST Beep Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Diagnostic Messages  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Diagnostic Message Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Failed Diagnostic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Failed Diagnostic Messages That Prevent Proper Testing  
. . . . . . . . . 131  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
SCSI Message Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
SCSI Messages  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare Server ODI Driver Messages . . . . . . . 136  
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) Driver Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) Driver Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
UNIX Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Troubleshooting the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Resolving Memory-Address Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Changing the Software Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Changing the Hardware Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
107  
Identifying Problems Using Status LEDs  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
LED Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Recovering BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Checking the System for Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
After Dropping It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
After Spilling Liquid on It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Replacing the Battery  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
108 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Tools Overview  
Diagnostic Tools Overview  
The following tools are available to help identify and resolve hardware-related  
problems:  
Ÿ LEDs on the system board, power supplies, and Ethernet adapters  
Ÿ Diagnostic test programs  
Ÿ Power-on self-test (POST)  
Ÿ POST beep codes  
Ÿ Error messages  
Ÿ Troubleshooting charts  
Ÿ Option diskettes  
Diagnostic LEDs  
When a system error occurs, the relevant LEDs on the system board are lighted to  
identify where the errors are (see “System Board LEDs” on page 168). When you  
see the System Error LED illuminated on the operator LED (status) panel on the  
front of the server, check the LEDs on the power supplies and at any Ethernet  
adapters, then open the cover and see which LEDs are illuminated on the system  
board.  
Diagnostic Test Programs  
The server diagnostics test programs are stored in nonvolatile random-access  
memory (NVRAM) on the system board. These programs are the primary method  
of testing the system board, memory, and other standard features of your Netfinity  
5000 server. You can also use them to test some external devices.  
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused by the hardware or by  
the software, you can run the test programs to confirm that the hardware is working  
properly.  
The server diagnostic test programs can identify most problems associated with  
major components of your server: the system board, Ethernet controller, video  
controller, RAM, diskette drive, serial port, parallel port, keyboard, and mouse.  
You can start the diagnostic test programs from the Startup panel, when the  
message Press F2 for Diagnostics appears. Test options let you batch groups of  
tests, specify test parameters (for example, which memory DIMM you want to test),  
and specify the number of passes that you want to run (one through continuous).  
You can also view the server configuration information from the Diagnostic Utility  
menu. For example, you can view the interrupt request (IRQ) and direct memory  
access (DMA) assignments, memory usage, device drivers, and so on.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 109  
Diagnostic Tools Overview  
Power-On Self-Test (POST)  
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of  
server components and some options. This series of tests is called the power-on  
self-test, or POST.  
POST does the following:  
Ÿ Checks the operation of some basic system-board operations  
Ÿ Checks the memory  
Ÿ Compares the current server configuration with the stored server configuration  
information  
Ÿ Configures PCI adapters  
Ÿ Starts the video operation  
Ÿ Verifies that drives (such as the diskette, CD-ROM, and hard disk drives) are  
connected properly  
If you have a power-on password or administrator password set, you must type the  
password and press Enter before POST will continue.  
While the memory is being tested, the amount of available memory appears on the  
screen. These numbers advance as the system progresses through POST and the  
final number that appears on the screen represents the amount of memory  
available. If POST finishes without detecting any problems, a single beep sounds  
and the first screen of your operating system or application program appears.  
If POST detects a problem, an error message appears on your screen. A single  
problem can cause several error messages to appear. When this occurs, work to  
correct the cause of the first error message. After the cause is corrected, the other  
error messages probably will not appear the next time you turn on the system.  
POST Beep Codes  
POST generates beep codes to indicate successful completion or the detection of  
an error.  
Ÿ One beep indicates successful completion of POST.  
Ÿ More than one beep indicates that POST detected an error. For more  
information, see “Power-on Self-Test (POST) Beep Codes” on page 122.  
Error Messages  
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be used to  
identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems indicated  
by error messages should be performed by a trained service technician.  
Hardware error messages that occur can be text, numeric, or both. Messages  
generated by your software generally are text messages, but they also can be  
numeric.  
110 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Test Programs  
POST Error Messages and Beep Codes  
POST error messages and beep codes occur during startup when POST finds a  
problem with the hardware or detects a change in the hardware configuration. For  
more information, see pages 122 through 124.  
Diagnostic Error Messages  
Diagnostic error messages occur when a test finds a problem with the server  
hardware. These error messages are alphanumeric and they are saved in the Test  
Log. For more information, see pages 125 through 134.  
Software-Generated Error Messages  
These messages occur if a problem or conflict is found by an application program,  
the operating system, or both. Messages are generally text messages, but they  
also can be numeric. For information about these error messages, refer to the  
documentation that comes with your software.  
Troubleshooting Charts  
The charts under “Troubleshooting Charts” on page 143 list symptoms of problems  
(for example, a symptom might be “The mouse is not working.”), along with steps to  
correct the problems.  
Option Diskettes  
An optional device or adapter might come with an Option Diskette. Option  
Diskettes usually contain option-specific diagnostic test programs or configuration  
files.  
If your optional device or adapter comes with an Option Diskette, follow the  
instructions that come with the option. Different instructions apply depending on  
whether the Option Diskette is startable or not.  
Diagnostic Test Programs  
This section includes useful information about navigating through the diagnostic test  
programs, as well as procedures for starting and stopping them. These programs  
are designed to test the IBM Netfinity 5000 server. If you want to test a non-IBM  
product, refer to the information that comes with that product.  
You can start the diagnostic test programs from the Startup panel, when the  
message Press F2 for Diagnostics appears.  
Note: When you run the diagnostic test programs, a single problem can cause  
several error messages to occur. When this happens, work to correct the  
cause of the first error message. After the cause is corrected, the other  
error messages probably will not occur the next time you run the tests.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 111  
Diagnostic Test Programs  
Navigating Through the Diagnostic Tests  
Error messages in the Test Log are stored by diagnostic test session. A diagnostic  
test session is defined as running one, all, or a selection of tests, one or more  
times. You can use the following keys to maneuver within the test program:  
Enter  
Selects an item.  
Down Arrow ()  
Up Arrow ()  
Left Arrow ()  
Right Arrow ()  
Moves the cursor down.  
Moves the cursor up.  
Toggles test selection between Yes and No.  
Toggles test selection between Yes and No.  
Page Down (PgDn) Moves to the next diagnostic test session in the log (if any).  
Page Up (PgUp)  
Moves to the previous diagnostic test session in the log (if  
any).  
F1  
Displays the appropriate Help information. Use the Up Arrow  
() or Down Arrow () key to scroll through the information.  
Pressing F1 from within a Help screen provides a help index  
from which you can select different categories. Pressing Esc  
exits Help and returns to where you left off.  
Esc  
Returns to the previous menu.  
Running Diagnostic Test Programs  
When you start the diagnostic test programs from the Diagnostic Utility menu, you  
can select the tests, the way the tests run, and the number of times the tests run.  
Notes:  
1. To run the diagnostic test programs, you must start the server with the highest  
level password.  
That is, if you enter the power-on password, and an administrator password is  
set, you cannot run the test programs. You can only view the error messages  
in the test log.  
If an administrator password is set, you must enter the administrator password  
to run the diagnostic test programs.  
2. If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server  
and try running the tests again. If the problem persists, have the system  
serviced.  
3. If the diagnostic tests do not find a problem, see “Troubleshooting” on  
page 143 and look for the problem symptom.  
4. You might have to install a wrap connector on your active parallel, serial, or  
Ethernet port to obtain accurate test results for these ports. If you do not have  
a wrap connector, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.  
5. You might need a scratch diskette to obtain accurate test results when testing  
the diskette drive.  
6. The keyboard and mouse tests assume that a keyboard and mouse are  
attached to the server.  
112 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Test Programs  
To start the diagnostic tests:  
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.  
If the system is turned on already, shut down your operating system and restart  
the server.  
2. When the message Press F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.  
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the system prompts  
you for it. Type in the appropriate password; then, press Enter.  
3. The Diagnostic Programs screen appears.  
4. Select Extended or Basic from the top of the screen.  
5. Select the test you want to run from the list that appears; then, follow the  
instructions that appear on the screen. The actions available include specifying  
the options for the tests to be run, such as the number of times to run the test,  
whether to stop on error, or whether to use a predefined overlay that describes  
the tests to be run.  
When the tests have completed, you can view the Test Log by selecting Utility  
from the top of the screen.  
Also, you can view server configuration information (such as system  
configuration, memory contents, interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory  
access (DMA) use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting Hardware Info from  
the top of the screen.  
If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists during normal server  
operations, a software error might be the cause. If you suspect a software  
problem, refer to the information that comes with the software package.  
Viewing the Test Log  
If you are already running the diagnostic programs, continue with step 4 in this  
procedure.  
To view the Test Log:  
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.  
If the system is turned on already, shut down your operating system and restart  
the server.  
2. When the message Press F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.  
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the system prompts  
you for it. Type in the appropriate password; then, press Enter.  
3. The Diagnostic Programs screen appears.  
4. Select Utility from the top of the screen.  
5. Select View Test Log from the list that appears; then, follow instructions on the  
screen.  
6. Press Esc to return to the Diagnostic Programs screen.  
7. Select Quit from the top of the screen; then, select Exit Diags to exit from the  
diagnostic programs. The server restarts.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 113  
POST Messages  
Power-on Self Test (POST) Messages  
The following table shows error messages that can appear on the screen during the  
power-on self-test (POST).  
Notes:  
1. The actions for some of the messages require you to run the  
Configuration/Setup Utility. For information about using these programs, see  
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
2. If a password prompt appears with a POST message, type the administrator or  
power-on password; then, press Enter.  
POST Message Table  
POST Message  
Description  
062  
The Netfinity 5000 server failed to boot on three consecutive attempts.  
All caches are disabled. This can be caused by repeatedly turning the Netfinity  
5000 server on and then off or resetting the Netfinity 5000 server.  
Action: Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and verify that all settings are  
correct. (See “The Configuration/Setup Utility.”) Use the Cache Control selection  
in the Advanced Setup menu of the Configuration/Setup Utility program to enable  
the caches. (See “Advanced Setup” on page 28.)  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced. When the problem is corrected,  
make sure to enable the caches.  
101  
102  
An error occurred during the system board and microprocessor test.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
106  
114  
An error occurred during the system board and microprocessor test.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
An adapter read-only memory (ROM) error occurred.  
Action: Remove the options. If you can start the server without the options  
installed, reinstall each option one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.  
When an option fails, replace it.  
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.  
An error was detected in the L1 cache of one of the microprocessors.  
Action:  
129  
1. If you just installed a microprocessor, verify that the microprocessor is installed  
and seated correctly.  
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a  
microprocessor:  
Ÿ If the System Error LED on the information LED panel is on, check to see if  
any Microprocessor Error LEDs on the system board are on (see “System  
Board LEDs” on page 168).  
– If a Microprocessor LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the  
microprocessor indicated by the LED (if the secondary microprocessor  
error LED is on, run the Alt. CPU diagnostic program). If the tests fail,  
replace the microprocessor.  
– If the microprocessor tests do not fail, have the system serviced.  
Ÿ If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program might provide additional information on the microprocessor error.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
A real-time clock (RTC) error occurred.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
151  
114 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
POST Messages  
POST Message  
Description  
161  
The real-time clock battery has failed.  
Action: Have the system serviced or replace the battery yourself. For additional  
information, see “Replacing the Battery” on page 159 and “Lithium Battery Notice”  
on page ix before you attempt to change the battery.  
You can use the server until you replace the battery. However, you must run the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs and set the time and date and other custom  
settings each time you turn on the server.  
162  
A change in device configuration occurred. This error occurs under one or more of  
the following conditions:  
Ÿ A new device has been installed.  
Ÿ A device has been moved to a different location or cable connection.  
Ÿ A device has been removed or disconnected from a cable.  
Ÿ A device is failing and is no longer recognized by the server as being installed.  
Ÿ An external device is not turned on.  
Ÿ An invalid checksum is detected in the battery-backed memory.  
Action: Verify that all external devices are turned on. You must turn on external  
devices before turning on the server.  
If you did not add, remove, or change the location of a device, a device is probably  
failing. Running the diagnostic test programs might isolate the failing device, but  
you must have the system serviced.  
163  
164  
The time of day has not been set.  
Action: Set the correct date and time. If the date and time are set correctly and  
saved, but the 163 error message reappears, have the system serviced.  
The server can be used until the system is serviced, but any application programs  
that use the date and time will be affected.  
A change in the memory configuration occurred. This message might appear after  
you add or remove memory.  
Note: The server can be used with decreased memory capacity.  
Action:  
1. If POST error message 289 also occurred, follow the instructions for that error  
message first.  
2. If you have installed or removed memory, run the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program; then, exit, saving the new configuration settings. For information  
about using the Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the  
Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
If the message appears again, shut down the Netfinity 5000 server, reseat the  
memory modules, and restart the Netfinity 5000 server.  
3. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a  
memory module:  
Ÿ If the System Error LED on the information LED panel is on, check the  
DIMM Error LEDS next to the memory sockets on the system board (see  
“System Board LEDs” on page 168). If a DIMM Error LED is on, run the  
diagnostic program for the memory.  
– If the tests fail, replace the DIMM. If the problem persists after you  
replace the DIMM, have the system serviced.  
– If the memory tests do not fail, have the system serviced.  
Ÿ If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program might provide additional information on the memory error.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
A vital product data (VPD) error occurred.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
175  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 115  
POST Messages  
POST Message  
Description  
176  
177  
178  
A security hardware error occurred.  
Action: Check for indications that someone has tampered with the server. If no  
one has tampered with the server, have the system serviced.  
184  
The power-on password information stored in your server has been removed.  
Action: From the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu, select System  
Security. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. For information about using  
the Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility”  
on page 22.  
If this information cannot be restored, have the system serviced.  
185  
A power failure damaged the stored information about the drive-startup sequence.  
Action: From the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu, select Start  
Options; then, follow the instructions on the screen. For information about using  
the Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility”  
on page 22.  
If this information cannot be restored, have the system serviced.  
A system board or hardware error occurred.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
186  
187  
The VPD serial number is not set.  
Action: The system serial number is set in the VPD EEPROM at the time of  
manufacturing. If the system board has been replaced, the system serial number  
will be invalid and should be set. From the main menu of the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program, select System Information, then select Product Data. If the  
problem persists, have the system serviced.  
188  
189  
A vital product data (VPD) error occurred.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
An attempt has been made to access the server with invalid passwords. After three  
incorrect attempts, the server locks up; that is, the logon data fields are no longer  
available to the user.  
201  
An error occurred during the memory controller test. This error can be caused by:  
Ÿ Incorrectly installed memory  
Ÿ A failing memory module  
Ÿ A processor-board problem  
Ÿ A system board problem  
Action:  
1. If you just installed memory, see “Installing or Removing Memory Modules” on  
page 54 to verify that the new memory is correct for your server. Verify that the  
memory modules are installed and seated correctly.  
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a  
memory module:  
Ÿ If the System Error LED on the information LED panel is on, check the  
DIMM Error LEDS next to the memory sockets on the system board (see  
“System Board LEDs” on page 168). If a DIMM Error LED is on, run the  
diagnostic program for the memory.  
Ÿ If the tests fail, replace the DIMM. If the problem persists after you replace  
the DIMM, have the system serviced.  
Ÿ If the memory tests do not fail, have the system serviced.  
3. If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility program  
might provide additional information on the memory error.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
116 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
POST Messages  
POST Message  
Description  
229  
An error was detected in the L2 cache of one of the microprocessors.  
Action:  
1. If you just installed a microprocessor, verify that the microprocessor is installed  
and seated correctly.  
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a  
microprocessor:  
Ÿ If the System Error LED on the information LED panel is on, check the  
Microprocessor Error LEDs next to the microprocessor sockets on the  
system board (see “System Board LEDs” on page 168).  
– If a Microprocessor LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the  
microprocessor indicated by the LED. If the tests fail, replace the  
microprocessor.  
– If the microprocessor tests do not fail, have the system serviced.  
Ÿ If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program might provide additional information on the microprocessor error.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
An error occurred during POST memory tests and a failing DIMM was disabled.  
Note: The Netfinity 5000 server can be used with decreased memory.  
Action:  
289  
1. If you just installed memory, see “Installing or Removing Memory Modules” on  
page 54 to verify that the new memory is correct for your server. Verify that the  
memory modules are installed and seated correctly. Start the  
Configuration/Setup Utility program (see “The Configuration/Setup Utility” on  
page 21). In the Advanced Setup menu, select Memory Settings and enable  
the DIMM. (See “Advanced Setup” on page 28.)  
2. If the problem persists, try the DIMM in a different memory socket. If the error  
occurs in the new location, the DIMM is faulty; replace the failing DIMM.  
Otherwise, have the system serviced.  
301  
303  
An error occurred during the keyboard and keyboard controller test. These error  
messages also might be accompanied by continuous beeping.  
Action: Ensure that:  
1. Nothing is resting on the keyboard and pressing a key.  
2. No key is stuck.  
3. The keyboard cable is connected correctly to the keyboard and to the correct  
connector on the server.  
Running the diagnostic tests can isolate the server component that failed, but you  
must have your system serviced. If the error message remains, have the keyboard,  
cable, and system serviced.  
Note: If you have just connected a new mouse or other pointing device, turn off  
the server and disconnect that device. Wait at least five seconds, and then,  
turn on the server. If the error message goes away, replace the device.  
604  
662  
An error occurred during a diskette drive test.  
Action:  
1. Verify that the Configuration/Setup utility programs correctly reflect the type of  
diskette drive that you have installed.  
2. Run the diagnostic tests. If the diagnostic tests fail, have the system serviced.  
A diskette drive configuration error occurred.  
Action: If you removed a diskette drive, make sure that the diskette drive setting is  
correct in the Configuration/Setup utility programs. If the setting is not correct,  
change it. For information about using the Configuration/Setup utility programs, see  
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 117  
POST Messages  
POST Message  
Description  
962  
A parallel port configuration error occurred.  
Action: If you changed a hardware option, make sure that the parallel port setting  
is correct in the Configuration/Setup utility programs. If the setting is not correct,  
change it. For information about using the Configuration/Setup utility programs, see  
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
11xx  
An error occurred during the system-board serial port test.  
Action: If you have a modem, serial printer, or other serial device attached to your  
server, verify that the serial cable is connected correctly. If it is, use the following  
procedure:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Disconnect the serial cable from the serial port.  
3. Wait five seconds; then, turn on the server.  
If the POST error message does not reappear, either the serial cable or the device  
is probably failing. See the documentation that comes with the serial device for  
additional testing information.  
If the POST error message reappears, have the system serviced.  
The serial port configuration conflicts with another device in the system.  
Action:  
1162  
1. Make sure the IRQ and I/O port assignments needed by the serial port are  
available. (See “The Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 21.)  
2. If all interrupts are being used by adapters, you might need to remove an  
adapter to make an interrupt available to the PCI adapter, or force other  
adapters to share an interrupt. For information about removing adapters, see  
“Installing or Removing Adapters” on page 50. For information about setting  
interrupts, see “The Configuration/Setup Utility.”  
1600  
POST is unable to communicate with the system-management processor.  
Action:  
1. If the Service Processor Error LED (CR49) on the system board is on, have  
your system serviced. (See “System Board LEDs” on page 168 for the location  
of the LED.)  
2. If the Service Processor Error LED is not on, disconnect the Netfinity 5000  
server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds, reconnect the Netfinity  
5000 server to the electrical sources, and restart the Netfinity 5000 server.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
The Advanced System Management controller BIOS needs to be updated.  
Action:  
1601  
1. Disconnect the server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds, reconnect  
the server to the electrical sources, and restart the server.  
2. If the problem persists, update the Advanced System Management controller  
BIOS. Refer to the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server Library for  
information about obtaining updates.  
1800  
A PCI adapter has requested a hardware interrupt that is not available.  
Action:  
1. Make sure that the PCI adapter and all other adapters are set correctly in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs. If the interrupt resource settings are not  
correct, change the settings. See “PCI Bus Control” on page 29.  
2. If all interrupts are being used by other adapters, you might need to remove an  
adapter to make an interrupt available to the PCI adapter, or force other  
adapters to share an interrupt. For information about removing adapters, see  
“Installing or Removing Adapters” on page 50. For information about setting  
interrupts, see see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29.  
118 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
POST Messages  
POST Message  
Description  
1801  
A PCI adapter has requested memory resources that are not available.  
Action:  
1. Make sure that the PCI adapter and all other adapters are set correctly in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs. If the memory resource settings are not  
correct, change the settings. For information about using the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility”  
on page 22.  
2. If all memory resources are being used, you might need to remove an adapter  
to make memory available to the PCI adapter. For information about removing  
adapters, see “Installing or Removing Adapters” on page 50. Disabling the  
adapter BIOS on the adapter might correct the error. Refer to the  
documentation provided with the adapter.  
1802  
A PCI adapter has requested an I/O address that is not available, or the PCI  
adapter might be defective.  
Action:  
1. Make sure that the I/O address for the PCI adapter and all other adapters are  
set correctly in the Configuration/Setup utility programs. For information about  
using the Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the  
Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
2. If the I/O port resource settings are correct, the PCI adapter might be defective.  
Have the system serviced.  
1803  
A PCI adapter has requested a memory address that is not available, or the PCI  
adapter might be defective.  
Action:  
1. Make sure that the memory address for all other adapters are set correctly in  
the Configuration/Setup utility programs. If the memory resource settings are  
not correct, change the settings. For information about using the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility”  
on page 22.  
2. If the memory resource settings are correct, the PCI adapter might be defective.  
Have the system serviced.  
1804  
A PCI adapter has requested a memory address that is not available.  
Action: If all memory addresses are being used, you might need to remove an  
adapter to make memory address space available to the PCI adapter. For  
information about removing adapters, see “Installing or Removing Adapters” on  
page 50. Disabling the adapter BIOS on the adapter might correct the error. Refer  
to the documentation provided with the adapter.  
1805  
1806  
A PCI adapter ROM error occurred.  
Action: Remove the PCI adapters. If you can start the server without the  
adapters, reinstall each adapter one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.  
When an adapter fails, replace it.  
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.  
A PCI-to-PCI bridge error occurred. More than one PCI bus tried to access memory  
below 1 MB.  
Action: Remove the PCI adapter that has the PCI bridge. If you can start the  
server without the adapter, reinstall and retest the adapter. If the adapter fails,  
replace it.  
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 119  
POST Messages  
POST Message  
Description  
1962  
No valid startup devices were found. The system cannot find the startup drive or  
operating system.  
Action: Be sure that the drive you want to start from is in the startup sequence.  
1. Select Start Options from the Configuration/Setup utility program main menu.  
If you are unable to set the startup sequence, have the system serviced.  
2. Check the list of startup devices in the Startup device data fields. Is the drive  
you want to start from in the startup sequence?  
Yes Exit from this screen; then select Exit Setup to exit the  
Configuration/Setup menu. Go to step 3.  
No Follow the instructions on the screen to add the drive; then save the  
changes and exit the Configuration/Setup menu. Restart the server.  
3. Is an operating system installed?  
Yes Turn off the server. Go to step 4.  
No Install the operating system in your server; follow your operating system  
instructions to shut down and restart the Netfinity 5000 server.  
4. During server startup, watch for messages indicating a hardware problem.  
If the same error message appears, have the system serviced.  
2400  
2462  
An error occurred during the video controller (on the system board) test. This error  
can be caused by a failing monitor, a failing system board, or, if a video adapter is  
installed, a failing video adapter.  
Action: Verify that the monitor is connected correctly to the video connector. If the  
monitor is connected correctly, have the system serviced.  
A video memory configuration error occurred.  
Action:  
1. Make sure that the monitor cables are correctly and securely connected to the  
server.  
2. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
An IDE CD-ROM configuration error occurred.  
5962  
8603  
Action: Check the signal and power cable connections to the CD-ROM drive. See  
“System Board Connectors” on page 169 for the locations of the cable connectors  
on the system board.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
An error occurred during the mouse (pointing device) and mouse (pointing device)  
controller test. This error can be caused by the addition or removal of a mouse, or  
by a failing system board.  
Note: This error also can occur if electrical power was lost for a very brief period  
and then restored. In this case, turn off the server for at least 5 seconds,  
and then, turn it back on.  
Action: Ensure that the keyboard and mouse (pointing device) are attached to the  
correct connectors. If they are connected correctly, use the following procedure:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Disconnect the mouse from the server.  
3. Turn on the server.  
If the POST error message does not reappear, the mouse is probably failing. See  
the documentation that comes with the mouse for additional testing information. If  
the problem remains, have the mouse (pointing device) serviced.  
If the POST error message reappears, run the diagnostic tests to isolate the  
problem. If the diagnostic tests do not find a problem and the POST error message  
remains, have the system serviced.  
120 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
POST Messages  
POST Message  
Description  
00019501  
Processor 1 is not functioning.  
Action: Replace the primary microprocessor. (The Primary Microprocessor Error  
LED on the system board will be on. See “System Board LEDs” on page 168 for  
the location of the LED.)  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Processor 2 is not functioning.  
00019502  
00019701  
00019702  
Action: Replace the secondary microprocessor. (The Secondary Microprocessor  
Error LED on the system board will be on. See “System Board LEDs” on page 168  
for the location of the LED.)  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Processor 1 failed the built-in self test.  
Action: Replace the primary microprocessor. (The Primary Microprocessor Error  
LED on the system board will be on. See “System Board LEDs” on page 168 for  
the location of the LED.)  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Processor 2 failed the built-in self-test.  
Action: Replace the secondary microprocessor. (The Secondary Microprocessor  
Error LED on the system board will be on. See “System Board LEDs” on page 168  
for the location of the LED.)  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
01298001  
01298002  
01298101  
01298102  
No update data for the processor 1 (the primary microprocessor).  
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors  
installed in the server. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates from the World Wide Web.  
No update data for processor 2 (the secondary microprocessor).  
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors  
installed in the server. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates from the World Wide Web.  
Bad update data for processor 1 (the primary microprocessor).  
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors  
installed in the server. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates from the World Wide Web.  
Bad update data for processor 2 (the secondary microprocessor).  
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors  
installed in the server. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates from the World Wide Web.  
I9990301  
A hard disk drive error occurred.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
POST could not find an operating system.  
I9990305  
Action: Install an operating system. If you have already installed the operating  
system, check the drive startup sequence (see “Start Options” on page 28). If the  
drive sequence is correct, run the diagnostic tests to verify that the hard disk drive is  
functioning correctly. If there is a problem with the hard disk drive (such as a bad  
sector), you might have to reinstall the operating system.  
If you cannot reinstall the operating system, have the system serviced.  
AC power has been restored.  
I9990650  
Action: No action is required. This message appears each time AC power is  
restored to the server after an AC power loss.  
Other Numbers  
POST found an error.  
Action: Follow the instructions on the screen.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 121  
POST Beep Codes  
Power-on Self-Test (POST) Beep Codes  
The successful completion of POST is indicated by one beep and the appearance  
of the first screen of your operating system or application program. More than one  
beep indicates that POST detected an error.  
Beep codes are sounded in a series of beeps. For example, a 1–2–4 beep code  
sounds like one beep, a pause, two consecutive beeps, another pause, and four  
more consecutive beeps.  
POST Beep Code Descriptions  
The following list contains more detailed descriptions of the possible types of beeps  
that your server might emit.  
No beeps  
If no beep occurs after your server successfully completes POST (that is,  
after the System POST Complete (OK) light on the information LED panel is  
illuminated), have the system serviced.  
Continuous beep  
This indicates that your boot microprocessor has failed, or your system  
board or speaker subsystem might contain a failing component. If the  
system continues through POST with no errors, have the system serviced. If  
no video appears, the boot processor has failed; replace the boot processor.  
Note: If the Netfinity 5000 server has only one microprocessor installed,  
that microprocessor is the boot processor. If the Netfinity 5000  
server has two microprocessors installed, the microprocessor in the  
secondary microprocessor connector is the boot processor and the  
microprocessor in the primary microprocessor connector is the  
application processor.  
One short beep  
If one beep occurs after your Netfinity 5000 server successfully completes  
POST (that is, after the System POST Complete (OK) light on the  
information LED panel is illuminated), then POST has no configuration or  
functional errors to report. One beep also occurs after your server  
completes POST if you enter an incorrect power-on password.  
Two short beeps  
This beep combination indicates that POST encountered an error. The  
Configuration/Setup Utility program will display additional information; follow  
the instructions displayed. See “Power-on Self Test (POST) Messages” on  
page 114 for explanations of any POST error messages.  
Three short beeps  
This beep combination indicates a system memory error. This combination  
occurs only if the video BIOS cannot display the error message. The cause  
may be a failing memory module or a faulty memory socket. Try the  
identified DIMM (LED is illuminated) in a different memory socket. If the  
error occurs in the new location, replace the failing DIMM. Otherwise, have  
the system serviced.  
Repeating short beeps  
This beep combination indicates that your server system board might contain  
a failing component, your keyboard might be defective, or a key on the  
keyboard might be stuck.  
122 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
POST Beep Codes  
Ensure that:  
1. Nothing is resting on the keyboard and pressing a key.  
2. No key is stuck.  
3. The keyboard cable is connected correctly to the keyboard and to the  
correct connector on the server.  
Running the diagnostic tests can isolate the server component that failed,  
but you must have your system serviced. If the error message remains,  
have the keyboard, cable, and system serviced.  
Note: If you have just connected a new mouse or other pointing device,  
turn off the server and disconnect that device. Wait at least five  
seconds, and then, turn on the server. If the error message goes  
away, replace the device.  
One long and one short beep  
This beep combination indicates that POST encountered an error on a video  
adapter. If the integrated video adapter on the system board is being used,  
have the system serviced. If an optional video adapter is being used,  
replace the failing video adapter.  
One long and two short beeps  
This beep combination indicates that a video I/O adapter ROM is not  
readable, or the video subsystem is defective. If you hear this beep  
combination twice, both the server system board and an optional video  
adapter have failed the test. This beep combination might also indicate that  
your server system board contains a failing component.  
One long and three short beeps  
This beep combination indicates that the system-board video subsystem has  
not detected a monitor connection to the server. Ensure that the monitor is  
connected to the server. If the problem persists, replace the monitor.  
Two long and two short beeps  
This beep combination indicates that POST does not support the optional  
video adapter. This beep combination occurs when a video adapter is  
installed that is incompatible with your server. Replace the optional video  
adapter with one that is supported by the Netfinity 5000 server or use the  
integrated video controller on the system board.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 123  
POST Beep Codes  
POST Beep Code Table  
Beep Code  
Description  
1-1-2  
1-1-3  
1-1-4  
1-2-1  
1-2-2  
1-2-3  
2-1-1  
2-1-2  
2-1-3  
2-1-4  
2-2-1  
2-2-2  
2-2-3  
2-2-4  
2-3-2  
2-3-3  
2-3-4  
2-4-1  
3-1-1  
3-1-2  
3-1-3  
3-1-4  
3-2-1  
3-2-2  
3-2-3  
3-2-4  
3-3-2  
Microprocessor register test has failed.  
CMOS write/read test has failed.  
BIOS ROM checksum has failed.  
Programmable Interval Timer test has failed.  
DMA initialization has failed.  
DMA page register write/read test has failed.  
Secondary DMA register test has failed.  
Primary DMA register test has failed.  
Primary interrupt mask register test has failed.  
Secondary interrupt mask register test has failed.  
Interrupt vector loading has failed.  
Keyboard controller test has failed.  
CMOS power failure and checksum checks have failed.  
CMOS configuration information validation has failed.  
Screen memory test has failed.  
Screen retrace tests have failed.  
Search for video ROM has failed.  
Screen test indicates the screen is operable.  
Timer tick interrupt test has failed.  
Interval timer channel 2 test has failed.  
RAM test has failed above address hex 0FFFF.  
Time-of-Day clock test has failed.  
Serial port test has failed.  
Parallel port test has failed.  
Math Coprocessor test has failed.  
Comparison of CMOS memory size against actual has failed.  
Critical SM bus error.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
1-2-4  
1-3-1  
1-3-2  
3-3-1  
RAM refresh verification has failed.  
First 64 Kb RAM test has failed.  
First 64 Kb RAM parity test has failed.  
A memory size mismatch has occurred.  
Action: Reseat the memory modules. If the problem persists, have the system  
serviced.  
3-3-3  
2-3-1  
No memory in system.  
Action: Install or reseat the memory modules. If the problem persists, the cause  
may be a failing memory module or a faulty memory socket. Try the identified  
DIMM (LED is illuminated) in a different memory socket. If the error occurs in the  
new location, replace the failing DIMM. Otherwise, have the system serviced.  
Screen initialization has failed.  
Action: Reseat the optional video adapter, if any. If the problem persists, have the  
system serviced.  
124 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Messages  
Diagnostic Messages  
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be used to  
identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems indicated  
by these error messages should be performed by a trained service technician.  
Sometimes the first error to occur causes additional errors. In this case, the  
system displays more than one error message. Always follow the suggested action  
instructions for the first error message that appears.  
Diagnostic Message Tables  
The following pages contain the error codes that you might receive in the diagnostic  
program detailed test log and summary log when running the diagnostic programs  
for your Netfinity 5000 server.  
The format for the codes is:  
fff-ttt-iii-date-cc-text message  
where:  
fff  
is the three-digit function code that indicates the function being tested  
when the error occurred. For example, function code 089 is for the  
microprocessor.  
ttt  
is the three-digit failure code that indicates the exact test failure that  
was encountered. (These codes are for trained service personnel and  
are not listed here. They can be found in the IBM Netfinity 5000  
Hardware Maintenance Manual, which is available for purchase.)  
iii  
is the three-digit device ID. (These codes are for trained service  
personnel and are not listed here. They can be found in the IBM  
Netfinity 5000 Hardware Maintenance Manual, which is available for  
purchase.)  
date  
cc  
is the date that the diagnostic test was run and the error recorded.  
is the check digit that is used to verify the validity of the information.  
text message is a message that the diagnostic program generates that indicates  
the reason for the problem. More information about the text message  
follows.  
Text Messages  
The text message format is:  
Function Name: Result (test specific string)  
where:  
Function Name is the name of the function being tested when the error occurred.  
This corresponds to the function code (fff) given in the previous list.  
Result  
can be one of the following:  
Passed This result occurs when the diagnostic test completes  
without any errors.  
Failed  
This result occurs when the diagnostic test discovers an  
error.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 125  
Diagnostic Messages  
Aborted This result occurs when the user ends the diagnostic test  
before it is complete.  
Warning This result occurs when a possible problem is reported  
during the diagnostic test, such as when a device that is to  
be tested is not installed.  
Test Specific String This is additional information that the user can use to analyze  
the diagnostic problem.  
Failed Diagnostic Messages  
The following tables display the primary hardware failure messages that the  
diagnostics might display.  
Function: Core System Messages (001)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
System board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: Video System Messages (005)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Processor and system boards.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: Serial Port Messages (011)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
On system board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Failed  
On system board external loopback failure, assure loopback plug is attached.  
Action:  
1. Make sure the loopback plug is attached, and rerun the test.  
2. Retry the test with a different loopback plug, if available.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: Parallel Port Messages (014)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
On system board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Failed  
On system board external loopback failure, assure loopback plug is attached.  
Action:  
1. Make sure the loopback plug is attached, and rerun the test.  
2. Retry the test with a different loopback plug, if available.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
126 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Messages  
Function: USB Port Interface Messages (015)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
System board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: PCI Interface Messages (020)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
System board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: SCSI Interface Messages (030)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Internal SCSI interface.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: Power Supply Messages (075)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Voltage sensed by the system is out of range.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: Microprocessor Error Messages (089)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Secondary microprocessor in socket number U6.  
Note: The Secondary Microprocessor Error LED will be on. See “System Board  
Illustration” on page 168 for the location of the LED.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the secondary microprocessor (in connector U6).  
2. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Microprocessor in socket number U5.  
Failed  
Note: The Primary Microprocessor Error LED will be on. See “System Board  
Illustration” on page 168 for the location of the LED.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the primary microprocessor (in connector U5).  
2. If the problem persists, replace the primary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 127  
Diagnostic Messages  
Function: System-Management Processor Messages (165)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
System-management processor on system board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: Thermal System Messages (175)  
Function  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Fan #1  
Note: The FAN1 LED on the system board will also be on.  
Action: Replace fan 1.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Fan #2  
Failed  
Failed  
Note: The FAN2 LED on the system board will also be on.  
Action: Replace fan 2.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Temperature sensed on system board is out of range.  
Action: If one of the FAN LEDs on the system board is on, replace the indicated  
fan.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: Status Display Messages (180)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Information LED panel.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Diagnostics LED panel.  
Failed  
Failed  
Failed  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
LED on system board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
LED on hot-swap SCSI backplane.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: System Memory Messages (201)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
x MB DIMM location J22  
Note: x is the size in megabytes of the DIMM.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the DIMM in DIMM socket J22.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
x MB DIMM location J17  
Failed  
Note: x is the size in megabytes of the DIMM.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the DIMM in DIMM socket J17.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
128 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Messages  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
x MB DIMM location J16  
Note: x is the size in megabytes of the DIMM.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the DIMM in DIMM socket J16.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
x MB DIMM location J15  
Failed  
Note: x is the size in megabytes of the DIMM.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the DIMM in DIMM socket J15.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: System Cache Messages (202)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Microprocessor in socket number U2 (primary).  
Note: The Primary Microprocessor Error LED will be on. See “System Board  
Illustration” on page 168 for the location of the LED.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the primary microprocessor (in connector U2).  
2. If the problem persists, replace the primary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Microprocessor in socket number U21 (secondary).  
Failed  
Note: The Secondary Microprocessor Error LED will be on. See “System Board  
Illustration” on page 168 for the location of the LED.  
Action:  
1. Reseat the secondary microprocessor (in connector U21).  
2. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: Diskette Drive Messages (206)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Internal diskette drive bay.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Function: CD-ROM Messages (215)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
On system board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 129  
Diagnostic Messages  
Function: Hard Disk Drive Messages (217)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Failed  
Failed  
Failed  
Failed  
BIOS drive #1.  
Note: On a server that is not using RAID, this message indicates the physical hard  
disk drive that failed. In a RAID configuration, this message indicates the  
logical disk that failed rather than a specific hard disk drive. You will need to  
use your knowledge of the RAID arrays on the server to determine which  
hard disk drive or drives failed.  
Action:  
1. Replace the hard disk drive or drives.  
2. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
BIOS drive #2.  
Note: On a server that is not using RAID, this message indicates the physical hard  
disk drive that failed. In a RAID configuration, this message indicates the  
logical disk that failed rather than a specific hard disk drive. You will need to  
use your knowledge of the RAID arrays on the server to determine which  
hard disk drive or drives failed.  
Action:  
1. Replace the hard disk drive or drives.  
2. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
BIOS drive #3.  
Note: On a server that is not using RAID, this message indicates the physical hard  
disk drive that failed. In a RAID configuration, this message indicates the  
logical disk that failed rather than a specific hard disk drive. You will need to  
use your knowledge of the RAID arrays on the server to determine which  
hard disk drive or drives failed.  
Action:  
1. Replace the hard disk drive or drives.  
2. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
BIOS drive #4.  
Note: On a server that is not using RAID, this message indicates the physical hard  
disk drive that failed. In a RAID configuration, this message indicates the  
logical disk that failed rather than a specific hard disk drive. You will need to  
use your knowledge of the RAID arrays on the server to determine which  
hard disk drive or drives failed.  
Action:  
1. Replace the hard disk drive or drives.  
2. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
BIOS drive #5.  
Note: On a server that is not using RAID, this message indicates the physical hard  
disk drive that failed. In a RAID configuration, this message indicates the  
logical disk that failed rather than a specific hard disk drive. You will need to  
use your knowledge of the RAID arrays on the server to determine which  
hard disk drive or drives failed.  
Action:  
1. Replace the hard disk drive or drives.  
2. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
130 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Messages  
Function: Keyboard Messages (301)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
On system board keyboard test failed.  
Action:  
Failed  
1. Replace the keyboard.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the keyboard cable.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: Pointing Device (Mouse) Messages (302)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
On system board pointing device test failed.  
Action: Replace the pointing device (mouse).  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: Ethernet Messages (405)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
On system board.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Failed  
On system board external loopback failure, assure loopback plug is attached.  
Action:  
1. Make sure the loopback plug is attached, and rerun the test.  
2. Retry the test with a different loopback plug, if available.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Failed Diagnostic Messages That Prevent Proper Testing  
The following tables display failures that occur during diagnostics that prevent  
proper testing of the hardware.  
Function: Microprocessor Messages (089)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Test setup error: Primary microprocessor in socket number U2 is installed but not  
functioning; check system error log.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the primary microprocessor and run the  
microprocessor diagnostic program again.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Failed  
Test setup error: Secondary microprocessor in socket number U21 is installed but  
not functioning; check system error log.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor and run the  
microprocessor diagnostic program again.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 131  
Diagnostic Messages  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Test setup error: Invalid microprocessor in socket number U2 or BIOS setup  
problem.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the primary microprocessor and run the  
microprocessor diagnostic program again.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Failed  
Test setup error: Invalid microprocessor in socket number U21 or BIOS setup  
problem.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor and run the  
microprocessor diagnostic program again.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Test setup error: Secondary microprocessor not installed or BIOS setup problem.  
Action:  
Warning  
1. Verify that the secondary microprocessor is installed and seated correctly.  
2. If the problem persists, update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information”  
section of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.  
3. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor and run the  
microprocessor diagnostic program again.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: System Memory Messages (201)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Test setup error: Corrupt DMI BIOS, information in BIOS is not as expected.  
Action: Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this  
Server Library for information about obtaining updates.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Failed  
Test setup error: Unknown hardware problem associated with microprocessor in  
socket number U5.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS and run the diagnostic program again. See the “Getting Help  
Information” section of this Server Library for information about obtaining  
updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the primary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Failed  
Test setup error: Unknown hardware problem associated with microprocessor in  
socket number U6.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS and run the diagnostic program again. See the “Getting Help  
Information” section of this Server Library for information about obtaining  
updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
132 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Diagnostic Messages  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Test setup error: Corrupt BIOS in ROM.  
Action: Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this  
Server Library for information about obtaining updates.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Function: System Cache Messages (202)  
Result  
Test Specific String  
Failed  
Test setup error: No L2 cache detected on microprocessor socket U2 or BIOS setup  
problem.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS and run the diagnostic program again. See the “Getting Help  
Information” section of this Server Library for information about obtaining  
updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the primary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Failed  
Test setup error: No L2 cache detected on microprocessor socket U21 or BIOS  
setup problem.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS and run the diagnostic program again. See the “Getting Help  
Information” section of this Server Library for information about obtaining  
updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Warning  
Test setup error: Cache is disabled. Use system setup to enable before retrying the  
test.  
Action: Use the Cache Control selection in the Advanced Setup menu of the  
Configuration/Setup Utility to enable the cache. (See “Advanced Setup” on  
page 28.)  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Failed  
Failed  
Failed  
Test setup error: Corrupt DMI BIOS. Information in BIOS is not as expected.  
Action: Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this  
Server Library for information about obtaining updates.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Test setup error: BIOS cannot access VPD information.  
Action: Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this  
Server Library for information about obtaining updates.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Test setup error: Unknown hardware problem associated with microprocessor in  
socket number U2.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the primary microprocessor and run the  
diagnostic program again.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 133  
Diagnostic Messages  
Result  
Failed  
Test Specific String  
Test setup error: Unknown hardware problem associated with microprocessor in  
socket number U21.  
Action:  
1. Update the BIOS. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the secondary microprocessor and run the  
diagnostic program again.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Test setup error: Cannot allocate memory due to unknown memory problem.  
Action: Have the system serviced.  
Failed  
134 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
SCSI Messages  
SCSI Messages  
The following table lists messages that reflect problems with the SCSI controller or  
a SCSI device.  
Note: If your server does not have a hard disk drive, ignore any message that  
indicates that the BIOS is not installed.  
SCSI Message Table  
You will get these messages only when running the SCSISelect program. For  
more information, see the documentation that comes with the SCSISelect program.  
SCSI Messages  
Description  
All  
One or more of the following might be causing the problem:  
Ÿ A failing SCSI device (adapter, drive, controller)  
Ÿ An improper SCSI configuration or SCSI termination jumper setting  
Ÿ Duplicate SCSI IDs in the same SCSI chain  
Ÿ A missing or improperly installed SCSI terminator  
Ÿ A defective SCSI terminator  
Ÿ An improperly installed cable  
Ÿ A defective cable  
Action: Verify that:  
Ÿ The external SCSI devices are turned on. External SCSI devices must be  
turned on before you turn on the system.  
Ÿ The cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.  
Ÿ If you have attached an external SCSI device to the server, the external SCSI  
termination is set to automatic.  
Ÿ The last device in each SCSI chain is terminated correctly. See “Installing or  
Removing Internal Drives” on page 56 for more information about SCSI  
termination.  
Ÿ The SCSI devices are configured correctly.  
If the above are correct, run the diagnostic tests for additional information about the  
failing device. If the error recurs, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 135  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
The integrated Ethernet controller might display messages from the following device  
drivers:  
Ÿ Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare Server ODI  
Ÿ NDIS Adapter for level 2.01 (OS/2)  
Ÿ NDIS Adapter for level 4.0 (Windows NT)  
Ÿ SCO UNIX LLI  
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare Server ODI Driver Messages  
This section contains the error messages for the Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare  
server ODI driver. The explanation and recommended action are included with  
each message.  
PCNTNW-NW-026 The MSM is unable to parse a required custom keyword.  
Explanation: The user entered an incorrect parameter keyword.  
Action: Reload the driver using the correct keyword.  
PCNTNW-NW-054 The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.  
Explanation: The adapter did not respond when the driver tried to initialize it.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) setting in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
PCNTNW-NW-058 The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting might not be valid or the EEPROM information might  
be incorrect.  
Action: Make sure the IRQ settings are correct in the Configuration/Setup utility programs. See “PCI  
Bus Control” on page 29 for information on setting the interrupt requests. If the IRQ settings are  
correct, have the system serviced.  
PCNTNW-NW-066 The cable might be disconnected from the adapter.  
Explanation: The cable might be disconnected from the server Ethernet port.  
Action: Verify that a cable is connected to the Ethernet port.  
PCNTNW-NW-071 The matching virtual adapter could not be found.  
Explanation: You tried to load another instance of the driver with a different I/O address. This new  
adapter could not be found.  
Action: If you installed an Ethernet adapter, such as an IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter,  
as part of Ethernet redundancy (failover), make sure that the adapter is seated correctly. If the adapter  
is seated correctly, have the system serviced.  
PCNTNW-NW-072 A resource tag is unavailable.  
Explanation: The driver tried to allocate some resources that were not available.  
Action: Add or free some memory in the server. Then, restart the server.  
PCNTNW-NW-073 Unable to allocate memory.  
Explanation: The driver failed to allocate the memory needed for normal operation.  
Action: Add more memory, or free some memory resources in the server. Then, restart the server.  
136 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
PCNTNW-NW-074 The hardware interrupt cannot be set.  
Explanation: An attempt was made to initialize a given hardware interrupt. The attempt was not  
successful.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29).  
Make sure that the interrupt request numbers are set correctly. If you are using an ISA adapter, make  
sure resources are reserved as ISA Legacy in the Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “Plug and  
Play” on page 30.)  
PCNTNW-NW-075 The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) cannot be registered with the Link  
Support Layer (LSL).  
Explanation: An error occurred while the driver was trying to register with the LSL.  
Action: Check the version of the NetWare or IntraNetWare Operating System. Make sure that this  
driver is correct for the version of NetWare or IntraNetWare that you are using. Restart the server.  
PCNTNW-NW-079 The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) did not initialize MSMTx Free Count.  
Explanation: The MSMTx Free Count is not initialized correctly.  
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
PCNTNW-NW-086 The driver parameter block is too small.  
Explanation: The driver parameter block is too small.  
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
PCNTNW-NW-087 The media parameter block is too small.  
Explanation: The driver media parameter block is too small.  
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
PCNTNW-NW-091 The hardware configuration conflicts.  
Explanation: You tried to load a new frame type for the existing controller. The hardware assumptions  
made in doing so are incorrect. This error can also occur if you try to specify a mode (such as,  
redundancy) that conflicts with another specified mode.  
Action: Make sure that your hardware configuration matches the software settings. See “PCI Bus  
Control” on page 29 for information on viewing and changing interrupt requests.  
PCNTNW-NW-126 The group bit in the node address override was cleared.  
Explanation: The IEEE address has a group bit indicating that an address belongs to a group of  
stations. This bit is used only as a destination address; it cannot be used as a source address. You  
tried to enter a source address with this bit set. The driver cleared the group bit of the source address.  
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.  
PCNTNW-NW-127 The local bit in the node address override was set.  
Explanation: The local bit in the IEEE address format indicates that the addresses are being managed  
locally. If you use the node address override capabilities of this driver to enter a new address, the local  
bit must be set. You entered an address without the local bit set. The driver has set the local bit.  
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.  
PCNTNW-NW-164 The device was not found.  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 137  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
PCNTNW-NW-165 The device was not found at IOADDRESS.  
Explanation: The Ethernet controller cannot be found at the I/O address specified.  
Action: The Ethernet controller does not require a parameter for the I/O address. Remove the I/O  
address parameter.  
PCNTNW-NW-167 PCI scan specified, device not found.  
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29).  
If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
PCNTNW-NW-180 The DMA parameter is not necessary for PCI device.  
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.  
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.  
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) Driver Messages  
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) drivers. The  
explanation and recommended action are included with each message.  
PCNTND-1 Unable to open the Protocol Manager.  
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.  
Action: Check and correct your configuration.  
PCNTND-6 Out of memory while allocating buffers.  
Explanation: The driver could not allocate the requested buffers.  
Action: Check your system configuration. Edit the PROTOCOL.INI file to reduce the number of  
Txbuffers and Rxbuffers specified for the driver.  
PCNTND-7 A Protocol Manager device error occurred.  
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.  
Action: Check and correct your configuration.  
PCNTND-8 Bad status for the Protocol Manager.  
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.  
Action: Check and correct your configuration.  
PCNTND-9 Cannot find the PROTOCOL.INI entry.  
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.  
Action: Check and correct your configuration.  
PCNTND-10 The Protocol Manager Input Output Control (IOCTL) failed.  
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.  
Action: Check and correct your configuration.  
PCNTND-11 Protocol Manager registration failed.  
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.  
Action: Check and correct your configuration.  
138 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
PCNTND-15 Device not found.  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
PCNTND-16 PCI scan specified, device not found.  
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
PCNTND-21 The adapter failed the checksum test.  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
PCNTND-23 WARNING: PCNET IRQ found = xx  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting (xx) in the PROTOCOL.INI file does not match the  
hardware IRQ setting.  
Action: Remove the IRQ setting from the PROTOCOL.INI file or change the IRQ setting in the  
PROTOCOL.INI file to match the IRQ setting shown in the PCI Routing selection of the System  
Information menu in the Configuration/Setup Utility. (See “PCI Routing” on page 23.)  
PCNTND-24 WARNING: PCNET IRQ does not match PROTOCOL.INI.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file does not match the  
hardware IRQ setting.  
Action: Remove the IRQ setting from the PROTOCOL.INI file or change the IRQ setting in the  
PROTOCOL.INI file to match the IRQ setting shown in the PCI Routing selection of the System  
Information menu in the Configuration/Setup Utility. (See “PCI Routing” on page 23.)  
PCNTND-25 PCI scan specified, PCI bus not found!  
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the PCI bus on your server.  
Action: Go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
PCNTND-29 WARNING: DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.  
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.  
Action: Remove the DMA setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file.  
PCNTND-33 PCNET device with specified IOBASE is already in use.  
Explanation: The specified I/O address number is already in use by another Ethernet controller or  
device.  
Action: Remove the I/O address setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 139  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) Driver Messages  
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 4.0 drivers. The explanation  
and recommended action are included with each message.  
PermaNet(tm) Server: No Secondary Adapter Found. Grouping Mode is disabled.  
Explanation: The failover option requires an adapter that is compatible with the device driver of the  
Ethernet controller on the system board. No such adapter was found.  
Action: Make sure the correct adapter is installed.  
.
PermaNet(tm) Server: Problem Occurs on the Primary Adapter. Switching over to the Secondary  
Adapter.  
Explanation: The system detected a problem with the primary Ethernet connection and has transferred  
all network traffic to the secondary Ethernet controller.  
Action: Identify the cause of the failure on the primary Ethernet connection. Restoring the operational  
state of the primary connection will cause the network traffic to automatically transfer to the primary  
Ethernet controller.  
PermaNet(tm) Server: Switching back to Primary Adapter.  
Explanation: The primary Ethernet connection is now operating correctly. Network traffic will  
automatically transfer to the primary Ethernet controller.  
Action: None needed, message is for information only.  
.
UNIX Messages  
This section contains the error messages for the SCO UNIX LLI driver.  
pnt0-2  
PCI search specified, PCI device not found!  
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.  
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29).  
If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
pnt0-6  
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during an interrupt. Please check your  
Streams parameters.  
Explanation: On a SunSoft Solaris system, this message indicates that the system is out of Streams  
memory blocks.  
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.  
Modify the interrupt request (IRQ) settings in the Configuration/Setup utility programs, or run the  
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.  
pnt0-7  
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during reset. Please check your Streams  
parameters.  
Explanation: The system is out of Streams memory blocks.  
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.  
pnt0-11  
Device not found!  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
140 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
pnt0-12  
Device failed checksum test!  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
pnt0-13  
add_intr_handler failed! Interrupts already enabled.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with  
other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify your hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.  
pnt0-14  
Cannot locate hardware.  
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any Ethernet controller.  
Action: Verify that the PCI Ethernet device type is set to the default (enabled) position in the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs (see “PCI Bus Control” on page 29). If the Ethernet adapter is  
enabled, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic utility.  
pnt0-15  
No more devices to open.  
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any more Ethernet controllers.  
Action: Verify that additional Ethernet adapters are present or replace the Ethernet adapter that fails to  
respond. If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic  
utility.  
pnt0-17  
Device fault...Reset initiated!  
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver has been reset due to a device fault.  
Action: Verify that additional Ethernet adapters are present or replace the Ethernet adapter that fails to  
respond. If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 111 to run the diagnostic  
utility.  
pnt0-19  
IRQ found for PCnet hardware does not match space.c (or pnt.conf)!  
Explanation: This is a warning message referring to the interrupt request (IRQ) that the SunSoft  
Solaris driver found in the system.  
Action: Ignore this message if you are sure that this is what you want to do. Otherwise, run the  
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.  
pnt0-20  
add_intr_handler failed! Unknown interrupt type.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with  
other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify your hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-21  
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range interrupt number.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with  
other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify your hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-22  
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range IPL.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with  
other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify your hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 141  
Ethernet Controller Messages  
pnt0-23  
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already occupied.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with  
other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify your hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-24  
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already shared at different IPL.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with  
other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify your hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-26  
The DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.  
Explanation: The Ethernet adapter does not require a DMA setting.  
Action: Edit the SPACE.C file to delete the DMA parameter.  
pnt0-29  
The IRQ number is already in use.  
Explanation: The specified I/O address is already in use.  
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to modify your hardware settings.  
pnt0-31  
I/O address is not necessary for the PCI device.  
Explanation: The I/O address specified is not required.  
Action: Remove the assigned I/O address specified for the Ethernet controller.  
142 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
You can use the troubleshooting charts in this section to find solutions to problems  
that have definite symptoms.  
Note: When a procedure requires you to open the cover of the server, be sure to  
read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 first.  
Troubleshooting Charts  
Look for the symptom in the left column of the chart. Instructions and probable  
solutions to the problem are in the right column. If you have just added new  
software or a new option and your server is not working, do the following before  
using the troubleshooting charts:  
Ÿ Remove the software or device that you just added.  
Ÿ Run the diagnostic tests to determine if your server is running correctly.  
Ÿ Reinstall the new software or new device.  
CD-ROM Drive  
Problems  
Action  
The CD is not working  
properly.  
Clean the CD by wiping it with a soft, lint-free cloth, from the center of the  
CD to the outer edge. Do not clean in a circular pattern. This can cause  
loss of data.  
If this does not correct the problem, clean the optical-head lens. Discs for  
cleaning the lens are available from your place of purchase.  
If a problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
The CD-ROM drive tray  
is not working.  
The system must be turned on. If the system is on and the tray does not  
eject, insert the end of a paper clip into the manual tray-release opening.  
If the drive still does not work correctly, have the system serviced.  
The CD-ROM drive is not  
recognized.  
Verify that:  
1. The primary IDE channel is enabled in the Configuration/Setup utility  
program.  
2. All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.  
3. the correct device driver is installed for the CD-ROM drive.  
Diskette Drive  
Problems  
Action  
The diskette drive in-use  
light stays on, or the  
system bypasses the  
diskette drive.  
If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:  
1. The diskette drive is enabled in the Configuration/Setup utility  
programs.  
2. The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try another diskette if you  
have one.)  
3. The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.  
4. The diskette contains the necessary files to start the system.  
5. Your software program is OK. See “Software Problem” on page 148.  
If the diskette drive in-use light stays on, or the system continues to  
bypass the diskette drive, have the system serviced.  
Monitor Self-Tests  
Action  
Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem  
with your monitor, refer to the information that comes with the monitor for  
adjusting and testing instructions.  
If you still cannot find the problem, have the monitor and system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 143  
Troubleshooting  
Monitor Problems  
Action  
The screen is blank.  
Verify that:  
1. The system power cord is plugged into the system and a working  
electrical outlet.  
2. The monitor power cord is plugged into the monitor and a working  
electrical outlet.  
3. The monitor is turned on and the Brightness and Contrast controls are  
adjusted correctly.  
4. The monitor signal cable is connected to the correct connector on the  
system.  
If the items above are correct and the screen remains blank, have the  
system serviced.  
Only the cursor appears.  
Have the system serviced.  
The monitor works when  
you turn on the system,  
but goes blank when you  
start some application  
programs.  
Verify that the primary monitor cable is connected to the video port.  
To find the video port, see “Input/Output Connectors” on page 12.  
Be sure that you installed the necessary device drivers for the  
applications.  
The screen flickers.  
Set the monitor for the highest, noninterlaced refresh rate available.  
To reset the refresh rate, use a utility program, such as AnyView  
Professional or WinMode.  
Wavy, unreadable,  
rolling, distorted screen,  
or screen jitter.  
If the monitor self-tests show the monitor is OK, consider the location of  
the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as transformers,  
appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause screen jitter  
or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens,  
turn off the monitor. (Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might  
cause screen discoloration.) Then move the device and the monitor at  
least 305 mm (12 in.) apart. Turn on the monitor.  
Note:  
1. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors. be sure the  
distance between monitors and diskette drives is at least 76  
mm (3 in.).  
2. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.  
3. An enhanced monitor cable with additional shielding is  
available for the 9521 and 9527 monitors. For information  
about the enhanced monitor cable, see your IBM reseller or  
IBM marketing representative.  
If the problem still exists, have the monitor and system serviced.  
Wrong characters appear  
on the screen.  
If the wrong language is displayed, update the BIOS with the correct  
language. See the “Getting Help Information” section of this Server  
Library for information about obtaining updates for the BIOS.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
General Problems  
Action  
Problems such as broken  
cover latch, broken door  
lock, or indicator lights  
not working.  
Have the system serviced.  
144 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
General Problems  
Action  
The server does not  
power on.  
Verify that:  
1. The power cables are properly connected to the server.  
2. The power outlet functions properly.  
3. The type of memory installed is correct.  
4. You have not installed more options than the power supply supports.  
If you just installed an option, remove it, and restart the server. If the  
server now powers on, you installed more options than the power  
supply supports.  
5. The LEDs on the power supply are on. See “Status Indicators” on  
page 9 for more information about the power supply LEDs.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
The system stops  
responding during startup  
If information on the monitor suggests a PCI problem (the system is hung  
at the PCI configure checkpoint, which is 0x1e):  
1. Restart the server and press Alt+F1 when the Press F1 for  
Configuration/Setup and Press F2 for Diagnostics messages  
appear. This will bypass PCI initialization (except video) and go  
directly to the Configuration/Setup Utility program.  
2. Disable the defective PCI adapter. This should enable the server to  
complete a normal startup.  
3. Restart the server.  
If the problem still exists, or there was no indication of PCI problems,  
have the system serviced.  
Intermittent Problems  
Action  
A problem occurs only  
occasionally and is  
difficult to detect.  
Verify that:  
1. All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the system  
and attached options.  
2. When the system is turned on, air is flowing from the rear of the  
system at the fan grill. If there is no air flow, the fan is not working.  
This causes the system to overheat and shut down.  
3. Ensure that the SCSI buses and devices are configured correctly and  
that the last external device in the external SCSI bus is terminated  
correctly. See “SCSI Devices” on page 58.  
If the items above are correct, have the system serviced.  
Microprocessor  
Problems  
Action  
The server emits a  
continuous tone during  
POST.  
The startup (boot) microprocessor is not working properly. If your server  
contains two microprocessors, the microprocessor in the secondary  
microprocessor socket is the startup microprocessor.  
1. Verify that the startup microprocessor is seated properly.  
2. If your server contains two microprocessors, remove the startup  
microprocessor and restart the server. If the server starts properly,  
replace the old startup microprocessor.  
3. Replace the startup microprocessor. Restart the server.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 145  
Troubleshooting  
Keyboard, Mouse,  
or Pointing-  
Device Problems  
Action  
All or some keys on the  
keyboard do not work.  
1. Make sure that the keyboard cable is properly connected to the  
system.  
2. Make sure that the system and the monitor are turned on.  
3. Try using another keyboard.  
If the items above are correct, have the system serviced.  
The mouse or pointing  
device does not work.  
1. Verify that the mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected  
and the device drivers are installed correctly.  
2. Try using another mouse or pointing device.  
If the problem still exists, have the server and the device serviced.  
Memory Problems  
Action  
The amount of memory  
displayed is less than the  
amount of memory  
installed.  
Verify that:  
1. The memory modules are seated properly.  
2. You have installed the correct type of memory (see “Working with  
Memory Modules” on page 54).  
3. If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration  
with the Configuration/Setup Utility program program. For information  
about using the Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the  
Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
4. All banks of memory on the DIMMs are enabled (see “Advanced  
Setup” on page 28). The Netfinity 5000 server might have  
automatically disabled a DIMM bank when it detected a problem or a  
DIMM bank could have been manually disabled.  
If the above items are correct, run the memory test from the Diagnostic  
Utility menu. The system might have detected a bad memory module and  
automatically reallocated memory to enable you to continue to operate. If  
the memory tests fail, have the system serviced or replace the failing  
DIMM.  
Option Problems  
Action  
An IBM option that used  
to work does not work  
now.  
Verify that all of the option hardware and cable connections are secure.  
If the option comes with its own test instructions, use those instructions to  
test the option.  
If the failing option is a SCSI option, verify that:  
1. The cables for all external SCSI options are connected correctly.  
2. The last option in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is  
terminated correctly.  
3. Any external SCSI option is turned on. You must turn on an external  
SCSI option before turning on the system.  
If the problem still exists, have the server and option serviced.  
Verify that:  
An IBM option that was  
just installed does not  
work.  
1. The option is designed for the system.  
2. You followed the installation instructions that come with the option.  
3. The option is installed correctly.  
4. You have not loosened any other installed options or cables.  
5. You updated the configuration information in the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program program. Whenever memory or an option is changed,  
you must update the configuration. For information about using the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs, see “Using the  
Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
If the problem still exists, have the server and option serviced.  
146 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
Parallel Port Problems  
Action  
The number of parallel  
ports displayed is less  
than the number of  
Verify that:  
1. Each port is assigned a unique address.  
2. The parallel-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.  
parallel ports installed.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Serial Port Problems  
Action  
The number of serial  
ports displayed is less  
than the number of serial  
ports installed.  
Verify that:  
1. Each port is assigned a unique address by the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program and none of the serial ports are disabled.  
Note: The management C connector is the same as a serial port  
connector, but it is used only by the integrated  
system-management processor and is not available for use by  
the operating system. This port does not appear in the  
Configuration/Setup utility program menus; it can be  
configured using Netfinity Manager.  
2. The serial-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Verify that:  
A serial device does not  
work.  
1. The device is designed for the server. See the “Getting Help  
Information” section of this Server Library for the .........  
2. The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.  
3. Make sure that the device is not connected to the management port  
C.  
Note: The management C connector is the same as a serial port  
connector, but it is used only by the integrated  
system-management processor and is not available for use by  
the operating system. This port does not appear in the  
Configuration/Setup Utility program menus; it can be  
configured using Netfinity Manager.  
Universal Serial Bus  
(USB) Port Problems  
Action  
The number of serial  
buses displayed is less  
than the number of serial  
buses installed.  
Verify that:  
1. Each bus is assigned a unique address.  
2. The serial-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.  
If the items above are correct, have the system serviced.  
Verify that:  
A USB device does not  
work.  
1. You are not trying to use a USB device during POST if you have a  
standard (non-USB) keyboard attached to the keyboard port.  
Note: If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached to the keyboard  
port, then the USB is disabled and no USB device will work  
during POST.  
2. The correct USB device driver is installed.  
3. Your operating system supports USB devices.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 147  
Troubleshooting  
Printer Problems  
Action  
The printer does not  
work.  
Verify that:  
1. The printer is turned on and is online.  
2. The printer signal cable is connected to the correct serial or parallel  
port on the system. For the location of the serial or parallel port, see  
“Input/Output Connectors” on page 12.  
Note: Non-IBM printer cables might cause unpredictable problems.  
3. You have assigned the printer port correctly in your operating system  
or application program.  
4. You have assigned the printer port correctly using the  
Configuration/Setup utility programs.  
If the items above are correct and the printer still does not work, run the  
tests described in the documentation that comes with your printer. If the  
tests show that the printer is OK, have the system serviced.  
Software Problem  
Action  
Suspected software  
problem  
To determine if problems are caused by the software, verify that:  
1. Your system has the minimum memory requirements needed to use  
the software. Refer to the information that comes with the software to  
verify memory requirements.  
Note: If you have just installed an adapter or memory, you might  
have a memory address conflict.  
2. The software is designed to operate on your system.  
3. Other software works on your system.  
4. The software that you are using works on another system.  
If you received any error messages when using the software program,  
refer to the information that comes with the software for a description of  
the messages and solutions to the problem.  
If the items above are correct and the problem remains, contact your  
place of purchase.  
Netfinity Advanced  
System Management  
service problems  
Action  
Netfinity Advanced  
System Management  
service reports a general  
monitor failure  
If the Service Processor Error LED (CR49) on the system board is on,  
have your system serviced. See “System Board LEDs” on page 168 for  
the location of the LED.  
Note: Initially, the Service Processor Error LED lights for one minute,  
then the server restarts in an attempt to clear up the error. If the  
Service Processor Error LED is lighted for longer than one minute,  
a reboot did not resolve the error.  
If the Service Processor Error LED (CR49) is not on, disconnect the  
Netfinity 5000 server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds,  
reconnect the Netfinity 5000 server to the electrical sources, and restart  
the Netfinity 5000 server.  
If a problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Note: If you cannot find the problem in the troubleshooting charts, go to “Running  
Diagnostic Test Programs” on page 112 to test the system. If you already  
have run the diagnostic tests, or if running the tests does not reveal the  
problem, have the system serviced.  
148 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Controller  
This section provides troubleshooting information for problems that might occur with  
the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet controller.  
Network Connection Problems  
If the Ethernet controller cannot connect to the network, check the following:  
Ÿ Make sure that the cable is installed correctly.  
The network cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is  
attached but the problem persists, try a different cable.  
If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use  
Category 5 cabling.  
If you directly connect two workstations (without a hub), or if you are not using  
a hub with X ports, use a crossover cable.  
Note: To determine whether a hub has an X port, check the port label. If the  
label contains an X, the hub has an X port.  
Ÿ Determine if the hub supports auto-negotiation. If not, try configuring the  
integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and duplex mode of  
the hub.  
Ÿ Check the Ethernet lights on the information panel.  
These lights indicate whether a problem exists with the connector, cable, or  
hub.  
– The Ethernet Link Status light illuminates when the Ethernet receives a  
LINK pulse from the hub. If the light is off, there might be a bad connector  
or cable, or a problem with the hub.  
– The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light illuminates when the Ethernet  
controller sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet  
Transmit/Receive Activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network  
are operating and that the correct device drivers are loaded.  
– The Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light illuminates when the Ethernet LAN  
speed is 100 Mbps.  
Ÿ Make sure that you are using the correct device drivers, supplied with your  
server.  
Ÿ Check for operating-system-specific causes for the problem.  
Ÿ Make sure that the device drivers on the client and Netfinity 5000 server are  
using the same protocol.  
Ÿ Test the Ethernet.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 149  
Troubleshooting  
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Controller Troubleshooting Chart  
You can use the following troubleshooting chart to find solutions to 10/100 Mbps  
Ethernet problems that have definite symptoms.  
Controller Problem  
Action  
The server stops running  
when loading device drivers.  
The PCI BIOS interrupt settings are incorrect.  
Check the following:  
Ÿ Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet  
controller is also assigned to another device in the  
Configuration/Setup Utility program.  
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some  
devices do not function well when they share an interrupt with a  
dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ assigned to the  
Ethernet controller or the other device. (See “Resolving  
Configuration Conflicts” on page 152.)  
Ÿ For NetWare and IntraNetware, do not use IRQ 14 or 15 for PCI  
devices. IRQ 14 is used for IDE devices (CD-ROM drive). If the  
IDE CD-ROM in your system is disabled, reserve IRQ 14 as ISA  
Legacy in the Plug and Play menu of the Configuration/Setup  
Utility program. (See “Plug and Play” on page 30.) IRQ 15  
should be reserved for ISA legacy devices.  
Ÿ Make sure that you are using the most recent device driver  
available from the World Wide Web. (See the “Getting Help  
Information” section of this Server Library for World Wide Web  
addresses.)  
Ÿ Run the network diagnostic program.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Check the following:  
Ethernet Link Status light  
does not light.  
Ÿ Make sure that the hub is turned on.  
Ÿ Check all connections at the Ethernet and the hub.  
Ÿ Check the cable. A crossover cable is required unless the hub  
has an X designation.  
Ÿ Use another port on the hub.  
Ÿ If the hub does not support auto-negotiation, manually configure  
the Ethernet controller to match the hub.  
Ÿ If you manually configured the duplex mode, make sure that you  
also manually configure the speed.  
Ÿ Run diagnostics for the LEDs.  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Check the following:  
The Ethernet  
Transmit/Receive Activity  
light does not light.  
Note: The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity LED illuminates only  
when data is sent to or by this Ethernet controller.  
Ÿ Make sure that you have loaded the network device drivers.  
Ÿ The network might be idle. Try sending data from this workstation.  
Ÿ Run diagnostics on the LEDs.  
Ÿ The function of this LED can be changed through device driver  
load parameters. If necessary, remove any LED parameter  
settings when you load the device drivers.  
Data is incorrect or sporadic.  
Check the following:  
Ÿ Make sure that you are using Category 5 cabling when operating  
the server at 100 Mbps.  
Ÿ Make sure that the cables do not run close to noise-inducing  
sources like fluorescent lights.  
150 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
Controller Problem  
Action  
The Ethernet stopped  
working when another  
adapter was added to the  
server.  
Check the following:  
Ÿ Make sure that the cable is connected to the Ethernet.  
Ÿ Make sure that your PCI system BIOS is current.  
Ÿ Reseat the adapter (see “Working with Adapters” on page 49).  
Ÿ Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet  
adapter is also assigned to another device in the  
Configuration/Setup Utility program.  
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some  
devices do not function well when they share an interrupt with a  
dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ assigned to the  
Ethernet adapter or the other device. (See “Resolving  
Configuration Conflicts” on page 152.)  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Check the following:  
The Ethernet stopped  
working without apparent  
cause.  
Ÿ Run diagnostics for the Ethernet controller.  
Ÿ Try a different connector on the hub.  
Ÿ Reinstall the device drivers (see your operating-system  
documentation and your ServerGuide instructions, if you used  
ServerGuide to install your operating system).  
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 151  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
Resolving Configuration Conflicts  
The Configuration/Setup Utility program program configures only the system  
hardware. It does not consider the requirements of the operating system or the  
application programs. For these reasons, memory-address configuration conflicts  
might occur.  
Resolving Memory-Address Conflicts  
The Configuration/Setup Utility program program might change the  
memory-address space used by some hardware options. If this happens, the new  
address might conflict with addresses defined for use through expanded memory  
specification (EMS). (EMS is used only with DOS.)  
If a memory conflict exists, one or more of the following conditions might exist:  
Ÿ The system cannot load the operating system.  
Ÿ The system does not work.  
Ÿ An application program does not operate, or it returns an error.  
Ÿ Screen messages indicate that a memory-address conflict exists.  
You can resolve memory-address conflicts by changing either the software or  
hardware configuration setup.  
Changing the Software Configuration Setup  
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the software  
configuration by changing the addresses that the EMS device driver defined. The  
SVGA video memory occupies 8 Kb (1 Kb = approximately 1000 bytes) of space in  
the hex C0000 to C7FFF EMS memory area. EMS device drivers must use  
addresses different from those assigned to video read-only memory (ROM). You  
can use the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view or change the current  
setting for video ROM. For information about using the Configuration/Setup utility  
programs, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 22.  
If the SVGA or EMM386 device driver is causing the memory-address conflict, refer  
to your DOS documentation. For conflicts caused by device drivers supplied with  
application programs instead of those supplied with DOS, refer to the  
documentation that comes with the device drivers.  
Changing the Hardware Configuration Setup  
An alternative way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the address of  
the conflicting hardware option.  
152 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Identifying Problems Using Status LEDs  
Identifying Problems Using Status LEDs  
Your Netfinity 5000 server has LEDs to help you identify problems with some  
server components. These LEDs are part of the diagnostics built into the Netfinity  
5000 server. By following the path of lights, you can quickly identify the type of  
system error that occurred.  
Status LEDs are located on the following components:  
Ÿ Operator LED panel  
For more information, see “Status Indicators” on page 9.  
Ÿ Hard disk drive trays  
For more information, see “Server Controls” on page 7.  
Ÿ Power supply  
For more information, see “Power Supply LEDs.”  
Ÿ System board  
See “System Board LEDs” on page 168 for locations of the LEDs on the  
system board.  
Power Supply LEDs  
The AC Power LEDs on the power supply provide status information about the  
power supply. See “Status Indicators” on page 9 for the location of these LEDs.  
The following table describes the AC Power LEDs.  
AC Power LED  
Description and Action  
On  
Off  
The power supply is on and operating correctly.  
There is an AC power problem.  
Possible causes:  
1. There is no AC power to the power supply.  
Actions: Verify that:  
Ÿ The power cord is properly connected to the Netfinity  
5000 server.  
Ÿ The power outlet functions properly.  
2. The power supply has failed.  
Action: Replace the power supply.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 153  
Identifying Problems Using Status LEDs  
LED Diagnostics  
The diagnostics built into your Netfinity 5000 server allow you to quickly identify the  
type of system error that occurred. When the System Error LED on the information  
LED panel is illuminated, use the following information to isolate the problem. An  
error message usually appears on the display monitor as well.  
Ÿ If the System Error LED on the information LED panel on the front of the  
Netfinity 5000 server is on, a system error was detected. Check the LEDs on  
the power supplies and at any Ethernet adapters, then open the cover and  
check to see which of the LEDs on the system board inside the Netfinity 5000  
server are on. (See “System Board LEDs” on page 168 for the location of the  
LEDs.)  
System Board LED  
Description  
Service Processor Error LED  
on  
An error has occurred in the service processor.  
Actions: If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
NMI LED on  
A non-maskable interrupt occurred. The PCI 1 or PCI 2 LED  
will probably also be on.  
Actions:  
1. If the PCI 1 or PCI 2 LED is on, follow the  
instructions for those LEDs.  
2. If the PCI 1 or PCI 2 LED is not on, restart the  
Netfinity 5000 server. If the problem persists (the  
NMI LED stays on), have the system serviced.  
SMI LED on  
A system-management interrupt occurred. This is an indication  
of service processor activity, and is not an error.  
Actions: No action is required.  
PCI 1 LED on  
An error occurred on PCI bus 0. An adapter in PCI slot 5 or the  
system board caused the error.  
Actions: Check the error log for additional information. If the  
error log indicates a problem with the integrated  
Ethernet controller, have your system serviced.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
PCI 2 LED on  
An error occurred on PCI Bus 1. An adapter in PCI slot 1, 2, 3,  
or 4 or the system board caused the error.  
Actions:  
1. Check the error log for additional information.  
2. If you cannot correct the problem from the  
information in the error log, try to determine the  
failing adapter by removing one adapter at a time  
from the secondary PCI bus (PCI slots 1–4) and  
restarting the Netfinity 5000 server after each  
adapter is removed.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
The DIMM in DIMM slot 1 has failed.  
DIMM 1 Error LED on  
DIMM 2 Error LED on  
DIMM 3 Error LED on  
DIMM 4 Error LED on  
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 1.  
The DIMM in DIMM slot 2 has failed.  
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 2.  
The DIMM in DIMM slot 3 has failed.  
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 3.  
The DIMM in DIMM slot 4 has failed.  
Action: Replace the DIMM in DIMM slot 4.  
154 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Identifying Problems Using Status LEDs  
System Board LED  
Description  
FAN 1 LED on  
Fan 1 has failed or is operating too slowly.  
Note: A failing fan can also cause the TEMP and DASD 1  
LEDs to be on.  
Action: Replace fan 1.  
FAN 2 LED on  
TEMP LED on  
Fan 2 has failed or is operating too slowly.  
Note: A failing fan can also cause the TEMP and DASD 1  
LEDs to be on.  
Action: Replace fan 2.  
The system temperature has exceeded the maximum rating.  
Actions:  
1. Check to see if a fan has failed. If it has, replace  
the fan.  
2. Make sure the room temperature is not too hot.  
(See Table 11 on page 95)  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Integrated Voltage Regulator  
Error LED on  
The voltage regulator for the primary microprocessor slot has  
failed.  
Actions: Have the system serviced.  
Secondary Processor VRM  
Error LED on  
The voltage regulator module (VRM) for the secondary  
microprocessor slot has failed.  
Actions:  
1. Turn off the Netfinity 5000 server, reseat the VRM,  
and restart the Netfinity 5000 server.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the VRM.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Primary Microprocessor Error  
LED on  
The microprocessor in the primary microprocessor slot has  
failed.  
Actions:  
1. Turn off the Netfinity 5000 server, reseat the VRM,  
and restart the Netfinity 5000 server. and restart the  
Netfinity 5000 server.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
Secondary Microprocessor  
Error LED on  
The microprocessor in the secondary microprocessor slot has  
failed.  
Actions:  
1. Turn off the Netfinity 5000 server, reseat the  
microprocessor, and restart the Netfinity 5000  
server.  
2. If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor.  
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.  
The primary power supply has failed.  
Power Supply 1 LED on  
Power Supply 2 LED on  
Action: Have the primary power supply replaced.  
The secondary power supply has failed.  
Action: Replace the secondary power supply.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 155  
Identifying Problems Using Status LEDs  
System Board LED  
Description  
DASD 1 LED on  
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed.  
Actions:  
1. Check the error log for additional information. If the  
error log indicates a temperature problem and the  
fans are working correctly, have the system  
serviced.  
2. If the amber Hard Disk Status LED on one of the  
hot-swap hard disk drives is on, replace the hard  
disk drive.  
Ÿ System Error LED on the information LED panel on the front of the Netfinity  
5000 server is off. The diagnostics have not detected a system error.  
156 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Recovering BIOS  
Recovering BIOS  
If your BIOS has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during a flash  
update, you can recover your BIOS using the recovery boot block and a BIOS flash  
diskette.  
Note: You can obtain a BIOS flash diskette from one of the following sources:  
Ÿ Use the ServerGuide program to make a BIOS flash diskette.  
Ÿ Download a BIOS flash diskette from the World Wide Web. Go to  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support/, select IBM Server Support, and make  
the selections for your server.  
Ÿ Contact your IBM service representative.  
The flash memory of your server contains a protected area that cannot be  
overwritten. The recovery boot block is a section of code in this protected area that  
enables the server to start up and to read a flash diskette. The flash utility  
automatically recovers the system BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the  
diskette.  
To recover the BIOS:  
1. See “Preparing to Install Options” on page 43 through “Preparing a Tower  
Model” on page 44 or through “Preparing a Rack Model” on page 46 for  
instructions on powering off the server and removing the cover. Then, refer to  
the system-board diagram inside your server for the location of the switch  
block.  
2. Locate switch 5 (see “System Board Switches” on page 170).  
3. Set switch 5 on the switch block to On, to set boot block recovery mode.  
4. Insert the BIOS flash diskette in the diskette drive.  
5. Restart the server.  
Nothing appears on the display monitor, but the diskette drive activity indicates  
that BIOS recovery is under way. Recovery is complete when the system  
beeps and the Post Complete light on the operator LED panel is on.  
6. Remove the flash diskette from the diskette drive.  
7. Turn the server off.  
8. Set switch 5 to Off, to return to normal startup mode.  
9. Restart the server. The system should start up normally.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 157  
Checking the System for Damage  
Checking the System for Damage  
This section provides instructions on what to do if your system might be damaged.  
After Dropping It  
Look for loose cables and obvious damage. If any cables are loose, reconnect  
them securely. If there is obvious damage to the system, have it serviced.  
If you see no damage, turn on the system. If it works correctly, the system  
probably did not suffer any damage.  
If the system does not work correctly, turn it off and check the adapters and  
memory modules to ensure that they are connected correctly. Go to “Electrical  
Safety” on page 41 and follow the instructions for opening your system; then,  
reseat all adapters and memory modules.  
If the system still does not work correctly, run the diagnostic tests from diagnostic  
utility menu. For information about running tests, see “Running Diagnostic Test  
Programs” on page 112.  
After Spilling Liquid on It  
If liquid gets on the keyboard:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Unplug the keyboard from the back of the server.  
3. Turn the keyboard upside down to drain excess liquid.  
4. Dry off the keyboard with a lint-free cloth.  
After the keyboard is completely dry, plug it in and turn on the server. If it does not  
work correctly, have the keyboard serviced.  
If liquid gets inside the monitor:  
1. Turn off the monitor.  
2. Turn off the server.  
3. Unplug the monitor from the server and the electrical outlet.  
4. Have the monitor serviced immediately.  
If liquid gets inside the server:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.  
2. Unplug the server from the electrical outlet and all attached devices.  
3. Have the server serviced immediately.  
158 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Replacing the Battery  
Replacing the Battery  
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must  
be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must  
adhere to the following instructions and the requirements in the “Lithium Battery  
Notice” on page ix.  
2
CAUTION:  
When replacing the battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an  
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your  
system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with  
the same module type made by the same manufacturer. The battery  
contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or  
disposed of.  
Do not:  
– Throw or immerse into water  
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
– Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Note: In the U.S., please call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery  
disposal.  
If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a battery  
with heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental  
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be  
disposed of with normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge by  
the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of in a  
proper manner.  
To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-772-2227 within the United States, and  
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and Canada,  
call your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.  
Before you begin, be sure you have:  
Ÿ Read “Electrical Safety” on page 41 and “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices”  
on page 42.  
Ÿ Followed any special handling and installation instructions supplied with the  
replacement battery.  
Ÿ Removed the server side cover (see “Preparing to Install Options” on  
page 43).  
Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure your system and reset  
the system date and time.  
Chapter 6. Solving Problems 159  
Replacing the Battery  
To replace the battery:  
1. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System Board Illustration” on  
page 168).  
2. Remove the battery:  
a. Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the battery.  
b. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the front of the server.  
The spring mechanism behind the battery will push it out toward you as you  
slide it forward.  
c. Use your thumb and index finger to pull the battery from under the battery  
clip.  
d. Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base of the battery socket by  
pressing gently on the clip.  
3. Insert the new battery:  
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket, under  
the battery clip.  
b. As you slide it under the battery clip, press the battery down into the  
socket.  
4. Reinstall the server covers and complete the installation (see “Completing the  
Installation” on page 76).  
5. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and reset configuration parameters  
as needed.  
Ÿ To reset the system date and time, go to “Date and Time” on page 24.  
Ÿ To reset the power-on password, go to “Using the Power-on Password  
Menu” on page 25.  
Ÿ To reconfigure your system, follow the instructions given in “The  
Configuration/Setup Utility” on page 21 (all models).  
160 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Server Records and Specifications  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications  
Whenever you add options to your server, be sure to update the information in this  
section. Accurate, up-to-date records make it easier to add other options and, if  
the need should arise, to report a hardware problem.  
In addition to server records, this chapter contains specifications. These  
specifications include product dimensions, environmental operating requirements,  
system board layout, and jumper settings.  
This chapter contains:  
Record the Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Installed Device Records  
System Board Illustration  
System Board LEDs  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
System Board Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Bypassing an Unknown Power-on Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Changing Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Two-Pin Jumper Blocks  
SCSI Jumpers  
DASD Backplane Jumper Block Location  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Power Cords  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
161  
Record the Identification Numbers  
Record the Identification Numbers  
Record and retain the following information.  
Product Name  
IBM Netfinity 5000  
8659  
Machine Type  
Microprocessor Type  
Model Number  
Ø
Ø
with preinstalled hard disk drive  
without preinstalled hard disk drive  
Serial Number  
Key Serial Number  
Table 12. Server Identification Numbers  
The server serial number and other identification numbers are located on a label on  
the rear of the server.  
The server serial number is also located on the front bezel. On the tower model,  
the identification numbers are located near the bottom of the front bezel. On the  
rack model, the model number is located to the right of the 5.25-inch drive bays.  
Note: Two keys are provided with your server. Store the keys in a safe place. If  
you lose the keys, you must order a replacement lock mechanism and keys  
from IBM.  
162 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installed Device Records  
Installed Device Records  
Use the following tables to keep a record of the options installed in or attached to  
your system. You can also record your system's default configuration settings.  
This information can be helpful when you install additional options in your server or  
if you ever need to have your server serviced. Copy these tables before recording  
information in them, in case you need extra space to write new values later, when  
you update your system's configuration.  
Record in the following table the types and SCSI IDs for drives or devices attached  
to your server. If you attach a drive or other device to an adapter, be sure to  
record the descriptive information appropriately.  
Location  
Drive or Device Description  
Internal Devices  
Bay A  
Bay B  
Bay C  
Bay 1  
Bay 2  
Bay 3  
Bay 4  
Bay 5  
5.25-Inch CD-ROM Drive  
3.5-Inch 1.44MB Diskette Drive  
External Devices  
SCSI ID  
SCSI ID  
SCSI ID  
SCSI ID  
Table 13. Internal and External Drives and Devices  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications 163  
Installed Device Records  
Table 14 (Page 1 of 3). Configuration/Setup Program Defaults and Changes  
Option  
Default Value  
New Value  
Additional Information  
System Summary  
Microprocessor  
Microprocessor Speed  
Secondary Microprocessor  
Math Coprocessor  
System Memory  
Internal  
640 KB  
Extended Memory  
Cache Size (internal)  
Shadow ROM  
63 MB  
512 KB  
384 KB  
System ROM  
Diskette Drive A  
Primary Master Device  
Mouse  
F0000h — FFFFFh  
1.44 MB 3.5-inch diskette drive  
[ CD-ROM ]  
[ Installed ]  
System Memory Type  
Registered SDRAM  
Note: Both microprocessors must have the same cache size and type, and the same clock speed.  
System Information  
Product Data  
Machine Type/Model  
Flash EEPROM Revision Level  
System Board Identifier  
System Serial Number  
BIOS Date  
BIOS Revision Number  
SP ROM Date  
SP ROM Revision Level  
Diagnostics Revision Level  
Diagnostics Date  
Diagnostics Version  
SCSI BIOS Version  
System Card Data  
Model  
SubModel  
System Serial Number  
DASD Backplane  
Power Backplane  
Power Supply 1  
Power Supply 2  
PCI Routing  
Planar SCSI INT_A  
Planar SCSI INT_B  
Planar Ethernet INT_A  
Planar Video INT_A  
Planar USB INT_A  
IRQ11  
IRQ15  
IRQ9  
IRQ9  
IRQ10  
Note: The screen displays INT_A, INT_B, INT_C, and INT_D for each PCI slot. The default value for each is not routed.  
164 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installed Device Records  
Table 14 (Page 2 of 3). Configuration/Setup Program Defaults and Changes  
Option  
Default Value  
New Value  
Additional Information  
Devices and I/O Ports  
Serial Port Setup  
Serial Port A  
[ Port 3F8, IRQ4.]  
[ Port 2F8, IRQ3.]  
Serial Port B  
Parallel Port Setup  
Parallel Port  
[ Port 378 ]  
Parallel Port Mode  
Parallel Port DMA  
Mouse  
[ Standard ]  
[ None ]  
[ Installed ]  
Diskette Controller  
Diskette Drive A  
[ Enabled ]  
1.44 MB 3.5-inch diskette drive  
Video Setup  
Video Controller  
Video Memory  
S3 Incorporated 86C775/86C785  
1024 KB  
IDE Setup  
Primary IDE Channel  
Master Device  
Type  
[ Enabled ]  
[ Enabled ]  
CD-ROM  
Size  
650 MB  
Transfer selection  
Transfer Mode  
LBA  
Autoconfigure  
PIO mode 3  
Supported  
System Security  
Power-On Password  
Power-On Password  
Allow Unattended Boot  
Administrator Password  
Administrator Password  
User Change Power-On Password  
System Owners Name  
Start Options  
[ On ]  
[ On ]  
[ No ]  
Keyboard NumLock State  
Keyboard Speed  
Disketteless Operation Mode  
Displayless Operation Mode  
Keyboardless Operation Mode  
First Startup Device  
Second Startup Device  
Third Startup Device  
Fourth Startup Device  
Power On Self Test  
Virus Detection  
[ On ]  
[ Fast  
]
[ Disabled ]  
[ Disabled ]  
[ Disabled ]  
[ CD-ROM ]  
[ Diskette Drive 0 ]  
[ Hard Disk 0 ]  
[ Network ]  
[ Quick ]  
[ Enabled ]  
Note: The Virus Detection test checks for changes to the boot sector.  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications 165  
Installed Device Records  
Table 14 (Page 3 of 3). Configuration/Setup Program Defaults and Changes  
Option  
Default Value  
New Value  
Additional Information  
Advanced Setup  
Core Chipset Control  
PCI Bus Control  
Primary Bus MLT  
Secondary Bus MLT  
System SCSI Boot Precedence  
Planar SCSI ChA IRQ  
Planar SCSI ChB IRQ  
Planar Ethernet IRQ  
Planar Video IRQ  
Planar USB IRQ  
Slot PCI Interrupt Routing  
Device Enable/Disable  
Planar SCSI  
[ 30h ]  
[ 30h ]  
[ Disabled ]  
[ Autoconfigure ]  
[ Autoconfigure ]  
[ Autoconfigure ]  
[ Autoconfigure ]  
[ Autoconfigure ]  
[ Enable ]  
[ Enable ]  
[ Enable ]  
[ Enabled ]  
[ Enabled ]  
[ Enabled ]  
[ Enabled ]  
[ Enabled ]  
Planar Video  
Planar Ethernet  
Slot 5  
Slot 4  
Slot 3  
Slot 2  
Slot 1  
Cache Control  
Processor Cache Type  
Processor 1 Cache State  
Processor 1 Cache Size  
Memory Settings  
[ Write-Back  
[ Enabled ]  
512 KB  
]
[ Enabled ]  
Note: The screen displays Row 0 and Row 1 for each bank. The default value for each is Enabled.  
ISA I/O Recovery Timer Delay  
Svc. Processor Hardware Interrupt  
Plug and Play  
[ Full Delay ]  
[ Autoconfigure ]  
Adapter Configuration  
Memory Resources  
I/O Port Resources  
DMA Resources  
Interrupt Resources  
[ Enabled ]  
[ Plug and Play ]  
[ Plug and Play ]  
[ Plug and Play ]  
[ Plug and Play ]  
Note: For each of these, the screen displays a list of the resources. The default value for each is Plug and Play.  
166 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Installed Device Records  
The following table shows the defaults for system memory and extended memory in your server. Record  
changes to existing memory and upgrades here.  
Table 15. RAM Default Settings and Changes  
Option  
Default Value  
New Value  
Additional Information  
System Memory  
Extended Memory  
Connector J15  
Connector J16  
Connector J17  
Connector J22  
Total Memory  
640 KB  
63 MB  
64 MB Ø 128 MB Ø 256 MB Ø  
64 MB Ø 128 MB Ø 256 MB Ø  
64 MB Ø 128 MB Ø 256 MB Ø  
64 MB Ø 128 MB Ø 256 MB Ø  
Record expansion slot configuration information for your server in the following table.  
Table 16. Expansion Slot Configuration Information  
Option Description  
and Additional  
Information  
Slot  
Type  
IRQ  
DMA  
I/O Port  
ROM/RAM Address  
5
4
3
PCI  
PCI  
PCI  
1
2
Shared  
Shared  
1
1
Notes:  
1. Slots 1 and 2 are shared by adjacent PCI and ISA connectors.  
2. Before setting values, review “Resolving Configuration Conflicts” on page 30 and follow the instructions for avoiding  
configuration conflicts.  
3. Slots 1–4 are on PCI bus 1; slot 5 is on PCI bus 0.  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications 167  
System Board Illustration  
The following illustrations show some of the system board components. Refer to the label inside the  
system cover for detailed information.  
System Board LEDs  
System Board LEDs  
.1/ Microprocessor 1 error LED (CR1)  
.2/ Microprocessor 2 error LED (CR5)  
.3/ Integrated voltage regulator error LED (CR4)  
.4/ Voltage regulator module (VRM) error LED  
(CR12)  
.11/ Non-maskable interrupt (NMI) error LED  
(CR28)  
.12/ PCI bus 1 error LED (CR27)  
.13/ PCI bus 0 error LED (CR26)  
.14/ Reserved (CR25)  
.5/ Service Processor error LED (CR49)  
.6/ DIMM 1 error LED (CR13)  
.7/ DIMM 2 error LED (CR14)  
.8/ DIMM 3 error LED (CR21)  
.9/ DIMM 4 error LED (CR22)  
.1ð/ System-management interrupt (SMI) LED  
(CR29)  
.15/ DASD error LED (CR24)  
.16/ Temperature error LED (CR23)  
.17/ Fan 1 (DASD) error LED (CR15)  
.18/ Fan 2 (rear) error LED (CR16)  
.19/ Reserved (CR17)  
.2ð/ Reserved (CR18)  
.21/ Power supply 1 error LED (CR19)  
.22/ Power supply 2 error LED (CR20)  
168 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
System Board Connectors  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
System Board Connectors  
.1/ Systems management adapter connector  
(J21)  
.22/ Reserved (J37)  
.23/ Reserved (J36)  
.2/ Fan 2 connector (J6)  
.24/ Reserved (J41)  
.3/ System switch block (SW1)  
.4/ Microprocessor 2 connector (U21)  
.5/ Reserved (J1)  
.25/ Reserved (J39)  
.26/ Reserved (J32)  
.27/ ISA connector (J40)  
.6/ Microprocessor 1 connector (U2)  
.7/ Power connector (J3)  
.8/ Reserved (J8)  
.9/ Power connector (J4)  
.1ð/ Reserved (J12)  
.11/ Power supply data connector (J10)  
.12/ Voltage regulator module (VRM) connector  
(U20)  
.13/ Fan 1 connector (J13)  
.14/ DIMM 1 (J15), DIMM 2 (J16), DIMM 3 (J17),  
and DIMM 4 (J22) connectors  
.15/ SCSI connector (J18)  
.16/ Diskette drive connector (J23)  
.17/ IDE connector (J3)  
.28/ PCI/ISA connector, PCI bus 1 (J38)  
.29/ PCI connector, PCI bus 1 (J33)  
.3ð/ PCI connector, PCI bus 1 (J30)  
.31/ Battery  
.32/ PCI connector, PCI bus 1 (J28)  
.33/ PCI connector, PCI bus 0 (J24)  
.34/ Parallel/SCSI connectors (J19)  
.35/ Video port and Management C port  
connectors (J11) (Management C port  
connector is above the video connector.)  
.36/ USB 1 and USB 2 port connectors (J9)  
(USB 2 is below USB 1)  
.37/ Ethernet connector (J7)  
.38/ Mouse and keyboard connectors (J5)  
(The mouse connector is above the  
keyboard connector)  
.18/ Operator LED panel (J29)  
.19/ Reserved (J31)  
.2ð/ Power-on switch panel (J34)  
.21/ RS-485 connector (J35)  
.39/ Serial port A and B connectors (J2) (Serial  
port B is below serial port A)  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications 169  
System Board Switches  
System Board Switches  
The following table provides the system switch identifiers and descriptions of these  
switches. The system switch block is identified by key .3/ in the illustration at  
“System Board Connectors” on page 169.  
Note: Turn off the server and disconnect the power cord before moving any  
switches.  
Table 17. System Board Switch Block SW1  
Identifier  
Switch Description  
1
Switches 1, 2, 3, and 4 in combination specify the frequency for the microprocessor.  
See Table 18 on page 171 for details.  
2
3
4
5
Switches 1, 2, 3, and 4 in combination specify the frequency for the microprocessor.  
See Table 18 on page 171 for details.  
Switches 1, 2, 3, and 4 in combination specify the frequency for the microprocessor.  
See Table 18 on page 171 for details.  
Switches 1, 2, 3, and 4 in combination specify the frequency for the microprocessor.  
See Table 18 on page 171 for details.  
When On, perform BIOS recovery using boot block (boot block recovery).  
The recovery boot block is in a protected area of flash memory that cannot be  
overwritten. When the BIOS becomes corrupted (for example, if a power failure  
occurs during a flash update), the recovery boot block can be used to restore the  
BIOS. The code in the recovery boot block enables the server to start up and read a  
flash diskette. The flash utility automatically recovers the system BIOS from the  
BIOS recovery files on the diskette. When the flash is complete, the switch must be  
moved to the Off position.  
The default setting is Off (disabled).  
6
7
When On, sets the host bus speed to 66 MHz. When Off, the host bus speed is 100  
MHz.  
The default setting is Off.  
Power-on override.  
When On, overrides the power-on switch and forces power-on mode. The system  
will always boot without the use of the power-on switch.  
The default setting is Off (disabled).  
8
When On, bypass the power-on password. When Off, require the user to enter the  
power-on password at startup if one is set.  
The default setting is Off.  
170 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
Bypassing an Unknown Power-on Password  
Table 18. Switch Settings for Microprocessor Speed  
350 MHz  
400 MHz  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
450 MHz  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
ON  
OFF  
Bypassing an Unknown Power-on Password  
When a power-on password is set, POST does not complete until you enter the  
password. If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the  
server through one of the following methods:  
Ÿ Enter the administrator password at the power-on prompt, if an administrator  
password has been set. (If necessary, see “Using the Administrator Password  
Menu” on page 27 for details.) Start the Configuration/Setup Utility programs  
and change the power-on password. See “Using the Power-on Password  
Menu” on page 25.  
Ÿ Change switch 8 on the system switch block to On (Bypass Power-On  
Password). See “System Board Connectors” on page 169 for the location of  
the switch block.  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications 171  
Changing Jumper Positions  
Changing Jumper Positions  
The DASD backplane, which is the Netfinity 5000 SCSI backplane, contains two-pin  
jumper blocks, which are behind the daughterboard (SAF-TE) on the DASD  
backplane. Jumper block J4 controls the addressing of the SCSI hard disk drive  
hot-swap bays. See “SCSI Jumpers” on page 173 for details.  
Two-Pin Jumper Blocks  
Covering both pins with a jumper specifies one function of the jumper block.  
Covering one pin only or removing the jumper entirely changes the function of the  
jumper block. To change a jumper's position for a two-pin jumper block:  
1. Turn off the server; then disconnect the server power cord.  
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to Install Options” on page 43).  
3. Locate the jumper block, removing any adapters or components that may  
hinder access to the jumper block.  
4. Do one of the following:  
Ÿ Remove a jumper by performing either action:  
– Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.  
– Align one of the holes in the bottom of the jumper with one of the pins  
on the pin block, and then slide the jumper onto that pin only.  
Ÿ Place a jumper by aligning the holes in the bottom of the jumper with the  
two pins on the pin block, and then sliding the jumper onto these pins.  
5. Replace any components or adapters that you might have removed.  
6. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables (see “Completing the  
Installation” on page 76 for instructions).  
172 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
SCSI Jumpers  
The option jumper block on the DASD (SCSI) backplane defines the SCSI IDs for  
hot-swap drives. See the illustration in “DASD Backplane Jumper Block Location”  
on page 174 for the location of the option jumper block.  
Table 19 summarizes the settings for the DASD backplane SCSI option jumper  
block (J4).  
Table 19. Backplane Option Jumper Block  
Pins  
Description  
1-2 (A0)  
Removing the jumper from these two pins reverses the SCSI IDs on the  
backplane. For the tower model, these two pins are jumpered; for the rack  
model, the jumper usually is removed.  
3-4 (A1)  
5-6 (A2)  
Reserved. No jumper.  
These pins are always jumpered.  
Tower Addressing  
Rack (Reversed)  
Addressing  
A2  
A1  
A0  
A2  
J4  
A1  
A0  
J4  
Table 20 shows the SCSI IDs that you can use for hot-swap drives.  
Table 20. SCSI IDs for Hot-Swap Drives  
J4 Pins 1-2 (A0)  
Bay 1  
Bay 2  
Bay 3  
Bay 4  
Bay 5  
Jumpered (tower  
orientation)  
0
1
2
3
4
Jumper removed, DASD  
enclosure not rotated  
4
0
3
1
2
2
1
3
0
4
Jumper removed, DASD  
enclosure rotated for rack  
orientation  
Notes: When the DASD enclosure on a tower model has been rotated for rack-mount orientation  
and the jumper has been removed, the bays correspond to the rack model illustration on page 56.  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications 173  
DASD Backplane Jumper Block Location  
The following illustration shows the location of the DASD backplane SCSI option  
jumper block (J4).  
Power Cords  
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use  
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and  
plug with a properly grounded outlet.  
IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's  
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).  
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified  
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,  
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment  
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and  
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,  
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,  
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set  
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate  
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.  
174 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
IBM power cords for a specific country are usually available only in that country:  
IBM Power  
Cord  
Used in These Countries  
Part Number  
13F9940  
Argentina, Australia, China (PRC), New Zealand, Papua New Guinea,  
Paraguay, Uruguay, Western Samoa  
13F9979  
Afghanistan, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Austria, Belgium, Benin, Bulgaria,  
Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cameroon, Central African Rep., Chad, Czech  
Republic, Egypt, Finland, France, French Guiana, Germany, Greece, Guinea,  
Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast, Jordan, Lebanon, Luxembourg,  
Macau, Malagasy, Mali, Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco,  
Mozambique, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal,  
Romania, Senegal, Slovakia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Syria, Togo, Tunisia,  
Turkey, former USSR, Vietnam, former Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe  
13F9997  
14F0015  
14F0033  
Denmark  
Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka  
Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Dubai, Fiji, Ghana, Hong  
Kong, India, Iraq, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Nepal,  
Nigeria, Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, United  
Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia  
14F0051  
14F0069  
14F0087  
1838574  
62X1045  
Liechtenstein, Switzerland  
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, Somalia  
Israel  
Thailand  
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman Islands,  
Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala,  
Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan, Korea (South), Liberia, Mexico,  
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia,  
Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad (West Indies), United States of America,  
Venezuela  
Chapter 7. Server Records and Specifications 175  
Glossary  
This glossary includes terms and definitions from the  
following publications.  
attenuation. A decrease in magnitude of current,  
voltage, or power of a signal in transmission between  
points.  
The American National Dictionary for Information  
Systems, ANSI X3.172-1990, copyright 1990 by the  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Copies  
may be purchased from the American National  
Standards Institute, 11 West 42 Street, New York, NY  
10036. Definitions are identified by the symbol (A).  
AWG. American Wire Gauge.  
B
back up. To copy information, usually to diskette or  
tape, for safekeeping.  
The ANSI/EIA Standard 440-A: Fiber Optic  
Terminology. Copies may be purchased from the  
Electronic Industries Association, 2001 Pennsylvania  
Avenue, N.W., Washington DC 20006. Definitions are  
identified by the symbol (E).  
backup. Pertaining to a system, device, file, or facility  
that can be used in the event of a malfunction or loss of  
data.  
BBS. Bulletin board system.  
The Information Technology Vocabulary, developed by  
Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical Committee 1, of the  
International Organization for Standardization and the  
International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC  
JTC1/SC1). These definitions are identified by the  
symbol (I). Definitions from draft international  
standards, committee drafts, and working papers being  
developed by ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1 are identified by the  
symbol (T), indicating that final agreement has not yet  
been reached among the participating National Bodies  
of SC1.  
BIOS. Basic Input/Output System.  
BIOS (Basic Input/Output System). Code that  
controls basic hardware operations such as interactions  
with diskette drives, hard disk drives, and the keyboard.  
bit. Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary  
numeration system. Synonymous with binary digit. (T)  
bridge. A functional unit that interconnects two local  
area networks that use the same logical link control  
protocol but may use different medium access control  
protocols.  
A
adapter. A printed circuit board that modifies the  
system unit to allow it to operate in a particular way.  
buffer. (1) A routine or storage used to compensate  
for a difference in rate of flow of data, or time of  
occurrence of events, when transferring data from one  
device to another. (A) (2) A portion of storage used to  
hold input or output data temporarily.  
address. (1) A value that identifies a register or a  
particular part of storage. The value is represented by  
one or more characters. (2) The location in the storage  
of a computer where data is stored. (3) To refer to a  
specific storage location by specifying the value that  
identifies the location.  
bus. One or more conductors used for transmitting  
signals, data, or power. See also address bus and data  
bus.  
application. The use to which an information  
processing system is put; for example, a payroll  
application, an airline reservation application, a network  
application.  
byte. A string that consists of a number of bits, usually  
8, that are treated as a unit and represent a character.  
C
application program. (1) A program that is specific to  
the solution of an application problem. Synonymous  
with application software. (T) (2) A program written for  
or by a user that applies to the user's work, such as a  
program that does inventory control or payroll. (3) A  
program used to connect and communicate with  
stations on a network, enabling users to perform  
application-oriented activities.  
cable. The physical medium for transmitting signals; it  
includes copper conductors and optical fibers.  
cache. A buffer storage that contains frequently  
accessed instructions and data; it is used to reduce  
access time.  
CD-ROM. Compact disc read only memory.  
High-capacity read-only memory in the form of an  
optically read compact disc. See also CD.  
architecture. See computer architecture.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
177  
client. A functional unit that receives shared services  
from a server. (T)  
device. A mechanical, electrical, or electronic piece of  
equipment designed to serve a special purpose or  
perform a special function.  
clock. A device that generates periodic, accurately  
spaced signals used for purposes such as timing,  
regulation of the operations of a processor, or  
generation of interrupts. (T)  
device driver. A file that contains the code needed to  
use an attached device.  
diagnostic. Pertaining to the detection and isolation of  
code. A collection of instructions that is in a form that  
errors in programs and faults in equipment.  
can be read and processed by a computer.  
digital. (1) Pertaining to data in the form of digits. (A)  
collision. An unwanted condition that results from  
(2) Contrast with analog.  
concurrent transmissions on a channel. (T)  
DIMM. Dual inline memory module.  
compatibility. The capability of a hardware or  
software component to conform to the interface  
requirements of a given computer without adversely  
affecting its functions.  
direct access storage device (DASD). A  
nonvolatile-storage device, such as a diskette drive,  
hard disk drive, or CD-ROM drive, in which access time  
is effectively independent of the location of the data on  
the storage medium.  
configuration. The manner in which the hardware and  
software of an information processing system are  
organized and interconnected. (T)  
direct memory access (DMA). The transfer of data  
between memory and input/output devices without  
microprocessor intervention.  
configure. To set up a computer for operation by  
describing to the system the devices, optional features,  
and programs installed in the computer.  
disk array. Two or more hard disks interconnected to  
increase security, performance, or reliability.  
connector. An electrical part used to join two or more  
diskette. A small magnetic disk enclosed in a jacket.  
other electrical parts. (Contrast with port.)  
(T)  
control. The determination of the time and order in  
which the parts of a computer and the devices that  
contain those parts perform the input, processing,  
storage, and output functions.  
diskette drive. The mechanism used to seek, read,  
and write data on diskettes. It can be installed in, or  
attached to, a computer.  
display. A component capable of displaying  
information on a viewing surface; for example, a  
cathode ray tube or a gas panel.  
controller. A device that coordinates and controls the  
operation of one or more input/output devices, such as  
workstations, and synchronizes the operation of such  
devices with the operation of the system as a whole.  
DMA. Direct memory access.  
crossover cable. A type of 10BASE-T cable in which  
the transmit and receive data pairs are wired so that the  
transmit pair is terminated at the pin positions used by  
the receive pair at the opposite end of the cable. A  
crossover cable is used to connect the 10BASE-T port  
on an Ethernet controller to a 10BASE-T port on a  
repeater that does not perform the crossover function.  
duplex. Pertaining to communication in which data can  
be sent and received at the same time. Synonymous  
with full-duplex (FDX).. Contrast with half-duplex  
(HDX).  
E
ECC. Error correcting code.  
D
ECP. Extended Capability Port. An IEEE 1284  
standard signalling method for high speed bidirectional  
parallel communication between a computer and a  
peripheral device, that uses the hardware in the port to  
assist in the data transfer. It can use direct memory  
addressing (DMA) channels to move its data, and  
requires the peripheral device to control the  
DASD. Direct access storage device.  
data. (1) A re-interpretable representation of  
information in a formalized manner suitable for  
communication, interpretation, or processing.  
Operations can be performed upon data by humans or  
by automatic means. (T) (2) Any representations such  
as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is  
or might be assigned. (A)  
handshaking. ECP is generally used for printers and  
scanners. See also EPP.  
178 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
EDO. Extended data output.  
hardware. (1) All or part of the physical components  
of an information processing system, such as  
computers or peripheral devices. (T) (2) The  
equipment, as opposed to the programming, of a  
computer. (3) Contrast with software.  
EEPROM. Electrically erasable programmable  
read-only memory.  
EISA. Extended industry standard architecture.  
hexadecimal. Pertaining to a system of numbers to  
the base 16; hexadecimal digits range from 0 through 9  
and A through F, where A represents 10 and F  
represents 15.  
electrically erasable programmable read-only  
memory (EEPROM). EPROM that can be  
reprogrammed while it is in the computer.  
extended industry standard architecture (EISA). An  
expansion bus architecture used in a network server  
that provides compatibility among hardware  
components.  
hot swap. (1) A hard disk subsystem feature of  
servers and storage enclosures that enables you to  
remove and replace hard disk drives without turning off  
the system. (2) To replace a hard disk drive while the  
system is turned on.  
EPP. Enhanced Parallel Port. An IEEE 1284 standard  
signalling method for high speed bidirectional parallel  
communication between a computer and a peripheral  
device, that uses the hardware in the port to generate  
handshaking, strobing, and so forth. It controls all the  
transfers to and from the peripheral device, and is  
generally used for non-printer peripherals such as  
CD-ROM, tape, or hard disk drives. See also ECP.  
I
IEEE. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.  
IEEE Standard 802.3. A series of standards that  
define a type of LAN that uses an access method called  
carrier sense multiple access with collision detection  
(CSMA/CD) over cabling of various types. The cabling  
types defined by the standard are thick coaxial  
F
(10BASE5), thin coaxial (10BASE2), unshielded twisted  
pair (10BASE-T), and optical fiber (10BASE-F).  
file. A named set of records stored or processed as a  
unit. (T)  
initialization. Preparation of a system, device, or  
program for operation.  
flash memory. See electrically erasable  
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM).  
input/output. Pertaining to a device, process, or  
channel involved in data input, data output, or both.  
frame. (1) A data structure that consists of fields,  
predetermined by a protocol, for the transmission of  
user data and control data. The composition of a  
frame, especially the number and types of fields, may  
vary according to the type of protocol. (T)  
instruction. A statement that specifies an operation to  
be performed by a microprocessor, and that identifies  
data involved in the operation.  
frequency. The rate of signal oscillation, expressed in  
hertz.  
Internet Packet Exchange (IPX). The routing protocol  
used to connect Novell’s servers or any workstation or  
router that implements IPX with other workstations.  
Although similar to TCP/IP, it uses different packet  
formats and terminology. See also TCP/IP and Xerox  
Network Systems (XNS).  
H
half-duplex. In data communication, pertaining to  
transmission in only one direction at a time. Contrast  
with duplex.  
Internet Protocol (IP). A protocol used to route data  
from its source to its destination in an Internet  
environment.  
hard disk. A rigid magnetic disk such as the internal  
disks used in the system units of personal-computer  
systems and in external hard disk drives.  
I/O. Input/output.  
IPX. Internet Packet Exchange.  
IRQ. Interrupt request.  
hard disk drive. A disk drive that reads and writes  
data on rigid disks and can be installed in or connected  
to a computer.  
ISA. Industry standard architecture  
Glossary 179  
MDI. Medium Dependent Interface.  
J
MDI port. The port that acts as the electrical and  
mechanical interface between the twisted-pair link  
segment and the medium attachment unit.  
jumper. A connector between two pins on a network  
adapter that enables or disables an adapter option,  
feature, or parameter value.  
MDI-X. A port on a 10BASE-T repeater that performs  
the crossover function.  
L
medium. A physical material in or on which data may  
be represented.  
LAN. Local area network.  
LED. Light-emitting diode.  
megabyte. (1) For processor storage and real and  
virtual memory, 220 or 1 048 576 bytes. (2) For disk  
storage capacity and transmission rates, 1 000 000  
bytes.  
link segment. In simple terms, a single cable or  
interconnected cables that connect a device to a  
10BASE-T repeater. The cables in a link segment are  
unshielded twisted-pair cables that conform to the  
cabling specifications in IEEE Standard 802.3  
10BASE-T.  
memory. Addressable storage space in the computer  
that is used for temporary storage of instructions and  
data while a program is running, or for permanent  
storage of microcode. Contrast with auxiliary storage.  
load. To bring all or part of a computer program into  
memory from auxiliary storage so that the computer can  
run the program.  
menu. A list of options displayed to the user by a data  
processing system, from which the user can select an  
action to be initiated. (T)  
local area network (LAN). (1) A computer network  
located on a user's premises within a limited  
geographical area. Communication within a local area  
network is not subject to external regulations; however,  
communication across the LAN boundary may be  
subject to some form of regulation. (T) (2) A network in  
which a set of devices are connected to one another for  
communication and that can be connected to a larger  
network.  
microprocessor. A processor whose elements have  
been miniaturized into one or a few integrated circuits.  
(T)  
modem (modulator/demodulator). (1) A functional  
unit that modulates and demodulates signals. One of  
the functions of a modem is to enable digital data to be  
transmitted over analog transmission facilities. (T) (A)  
(2) A device that converts digital data from a computer  
to an analog signal that can be transmitted on a  
telecommunication line, and converts the analog signal  
received to data for the computer.  
logical. (1) Pertaining to content or meaning as  
opposed to location or actual implementation. (A)  
(2) Pertaining to a view or description of data that does  
not depend on the characteristics of the computer  
system or the physical storage. (A) (3) Contrast with  
physical. (A)  
N
NDIS. Network Driver Interface Specification.  
M
NetBIOS. Network BIOS. An operating system  
interface for application programs used on IBM personal  
computers that are attached to the IBM Token-Ring  
Network. See also BIOS.  
math coprocessor. In personal-computer systems, a  
microprocessor that supplements the operations of the  
system microprocessor, enabling the computer to  
perform complex mathematical operations in parallel  
with other operations.  
network. (1) An arrangement of nodes and connecting  
branches. (T) (2) A configuration of data processing  
devices and software connected for information  
interchange.  
MAU. Medium attachment unit.  
Mbps. Megabits per second.  
Mbps. Million bits per second.  
MBps. Megabytes per second.  
node address. The address of an adapter on a LAN.  
nonvolatile. (1) Pertaining to a storage device whose  
contents are not lost when power is cut off. (T)  
(2) Contrast with volatile.  
180 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
processor. A functional unit that interprets and  
executes instructions. A processor consists of at least  
an instruction control unit and an arithmetic and logic  
unit. (T) See microprocessor and central processing  
unit.  
O
ODI. Open-Data Link Interface.  
operating system. Software that controls the  
execution of programs and that may provide services  
such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output  
control, and data management. Although operating  
systems are predominantly software, partial hardware  
implementations are possible. (T)  
program. (1) A sequence of instructions that a  
computer can interpret and execute. (2) To design,  
write, modify, and test computer programs. (I) (A)  
prompt. A visual or audible message sent by a  
program to request the user's response. (T)  
P
R
pack. Two or more hard disks interconnected to  
increase security, performance, or reliability. Commonly  
referred to as a disk array.  
RAID. Redundant array of independent disks.  
RAM. Random access memory.  
packet. In data communication, a sequence of binary  
digits, including data and control signals, that is  
transmitted and switched as a composite whole. The  
data, control signals, and possibly error control  
information are arranged in a specific format. (I)  
random access memory (RAM). (1) A storage device  
in which data can be written and read. (2) A storage  
device into which data is written and from which data is  
read in a nonsequential manner.  
parallel port. An access point through which a  
computer transmits or receives data that consists of  
several bits sent simultaneously on separate wires.  
Contrast with serial port.  
RAS. Reliability, availability, and serviceability.  
read. To acquire or interpret data from a storage  
device, from a data medium, or from another source.  
PCI. Peripheral component interconnect.  
read-only memory (ROM). Memory in which stored  
data cannot be modified by the user except under  
special conditions. See also EEPROM, EPROM, and  
PROM.  
performance. One of the two major factors, together  
with facility, on which the total productivity of a system  
depends. Performance is largely determined by a  
combination of throughput, response time, and  
availability.  
record. (1) A set of data treated as a unit. (2) A set  
of one or more related data items grouped for  
processing.  
physical. (1) Pertaining to actual implementation or  
location as opposed to conceptual content or meaning.  
(A) (2) Contrast with logical. (A)  
refresh. (1) To recharge a memory location in volatile  
memory with an electric current so that it retains a state  
or binary value. (2) In computer graphics, the process  
of repeatedly producing a display image on a display  
surface so that the image remains visible.  
pin. One of the conducting contacts of an electrical  
connector.  
port. An access point for data entry or exit. (Contrast  
with connector.)  
register. (1) An integrated circuit that contains 8, 16,  
or 32 storage locations, each of which can store 1 bit of  
binary data. See also binary. (2) An area that stores  
binary data while it is being processed by the computer.  
POST. Power-on self-test.  
repeater. A device used to amplify or reshape signals.  
power-on self-test (POST). A series of diagnostic  
tests that are run automatically by a device when the  
power is turned on.  
resolution. In video monitors, a measure of the  
sharpness of an image, expressed as the number of  
lines and columns on the monitor screen or the number  
of pels per unit of area.  
processing. The performance of logical operations  
and calculations on data, including temporary retention  
of data in microprocessor storage while the data is  
being operated on.  
ROM. Read-only memory.  
Glossary 181  
subsystem. In computers, a secondary or subordinate  
system, usually capable of operating independently of a  
controlling system, and usually having a single purpose,  
such as displaying video or reading from and writing to  
hard disks. A subsystem can be integrated into the  
system board or on an adapter.  
S
SCSI. Small computer system interface.  
segment. A section of cable between components or  
devices. A segment may consist of a single patch  
cable, several patch cables that are connected, or a  
combination of building cable and patch cables that are  
connected.  
SVGA. Super video graphics array.  
symmetric multiprocessing. In personal-computer  
systems, a multiprocessing design that enables two or  
more microprocessors to run concurrently and work  
independently, with each microprocessor capable of  
performing any task.  
serial port. An access point through which a computer  
transmits or receives data, one bit at a time. Contrast  
with parallel port.  
server. (1) A functional unit that provides shared  
services to workstations over a network. (2) In a  
network, a data station that provides facilities to other  
stations.  
system board. In a system unit, the main circuit board  
that supports a variety of basic system devices, such as  
a keyboard or a mouse, and provides other basic  
system functions.  
SIMM. Single-inline memory module.  
T
slot. (1) A position in a device used for removable  
storage media. (2) One of several receptacles in the  
rear panel of the system unit into which a user can  
install an adapter.  
token. In a local area network, the symbol of authority  
passed successively from one data station to another to  
indicate the station temporarily in control of the  
transmission medium. Each data station has an  
opportunity to acquire and use the token to control the  
medium. A token is a particular message or bit pattern  
that signifies permission to transmit.  
small computer system interface (SCSI). A standard  
input/output interface used by personal computers.  
SMP. symmetric multiprocessing.  
transceiver. A physical device that connects a host  
interface to a local area network, such as Ethernet.  
Ethernet transceivers contain electronics that apply  
signals to the cable and sense collisions.  
socket. A receptacle for a microchip.  
software. (1) All or part of the programs, procedures,  
rules, and associated documentation of a computer.  
Software is an intellectual creation that is independent  
of the medium on which it is recorded. (2) Contrast  
with hardware.  
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). A  
communications protocol used in Internet and in any  
network that follows the U.S. Department of Defense  
standards for inter-network protocol. TCP provides a  
reliable host-to-host protocol between hosts in  
packet-switched communications networks and in  
interconnected systems of such networks. It assumes  
that the Internet protocol is the underlying protocol.  
startup sequence. In personal computers, the order  
that the computer uses to search the direct access  
storage devices for an operating system.  
storage. A functional unit into which data can be  
placed, in which it can be retained, and from which it  
can be retrieved.  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol  
(TCP/IP). A set of protocols that allow cooperating  
computers to share resources across a heterogeneous  
network.  
straight-through cable. A type of 10BASE-T cable in  
which the transmit and receive data pairs are wired so  
that each signal wire is terminated at the same pin  
position at each end of the cable. A straight-through  
cable is used to connect the 10BASE-T port on an  
Ethernet controller to a 10BASE-T port on a repeater  
that performs the crossover function.  
transmit. To send information from one place for  
reception elsewhere. (A)  
twisted pair. A transmission medium that consists of  
two insulated electrical conductors twisted together to  
reduce noise. (T)  
182 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
U
W
unshielded twisted pair (UTP). See telephone twisted  
write. To make a permanent or transient recording of  
pair.  
data in a storage device or on a data medium.  
utility program. (1) A computer program in general  
support of computer processes; for example, a  
diagnostic program, a trace program, a sort program.  
(2) A program designed to perform an everyday task  
such as copying data from one storage device to  
another.  
10BASE-F. 10 Mbps baseband fiber optic. Dual fiber  
point-to-point cabling with no defined maximum node  
count. Maximum fiber optic cable distance is 0.5–2 km,  
depending on system configuration. Covered by section  
16, 17, and 18 drafts of the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet  
standards.  
10BASE-T. 10 Mbps baseband twisted pair.  
V
Point-to-point twisted-pair cabling and repeaters to  
provide network services. There is no maximum node  
count. Maximum cable distance is 100 m. Covered by  
section 14 of the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards.  
virtual. Pertaining to a functional unit that appears to  
be real, but whose functions are accomplished by other  
means.  
10BASE2. 10 Mbps baseband 200 m. A low-cost  
version of 10BASE5, commonly known as Cheapernet.  
The maximum number of nodes per cable segment is  
30.  
volatile. (1) Pertaining to a storage device whose  
contents are lost when power is cut off. (2) Contrast  
with nonvolatile.  
10BASE5. 10 Mbps baseband 500 m. Commonly  
known as Ethernet. The maximum number of nodes  
per cable segment is 100.  
100BASE-TX. An IEEE 802.3 standard for baseband  
Ethernet data transmission at 100 Mbps over two pairs  
of Category 5 unshielded balanced cable or 150 Ohm  
shielded balanced cable.  
Glossary 183  
Index  
air vents 17  
Numerics  
altitude of server 95  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 58  
ANSI 58  
antiglare filter 16  
architecture  
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Controller 32  
25-pin parallel port 12  
4-pin universal serial bus port 13  
9-pin serial port 12, 23  
ISA 20  
PCI 30  
A
arranging workspace 16  
assigning interrupt requests 29  
attaching  
about this book xi  
accessing  
Configuration/Setup program 21, 27  
Diagnostic Utility program 21, 109, 111  
SCSISelect Utility program 35  
acoustical output of server 95  
adapters  
external drives 57  
internal drives 60  
U-bolt 74  
auto-negotiation 32  
deactivated 31  
Ethernet, configuring 33  
installing 50  
B
back view 12  
ISA-connector locations 49, 169  
locations 49, 167  
PCI-connector locations 49, 169  
removing 50  
slot position 50  
using, with external devices 72  
video 50, 152  
bandwidth 33  
battery  
disposal ix, 159  
failure error message 115  
handling precautions ix, 159  
heavy metal 159  
installing 160  
location 160  
ordering replacements 159  
removing 160  
adding  
adapters 50  
device drivers 82  
external options 72  
internal drives 60  
memory-module 54  
microprocessor upgrades 66  
security for server 24, 74  
U-bolt 74  
replacing 159  
baud rate  
Ethernet controller 32  
bays  
drive 56  
expansion 14  
installing drives 59  
internal drive locations 163  
preinstallation steps 59  
beep codes  
adjusting  
chair 16  
controls 16  
lighting 16  
monitor 16  
description 122  
during POST 122  
list 124  
administrator password  
deleting 27  
features 25  
forgotten 27  
purpose 27  
setting 27  
table 124  
beep codes, POST 110  
before you begin 40  
BIOS (basic input/output system)  
damaged 157  
Advanced Setup  
Cache Control 28  
PCI Bus control 28  
Advanced Systems Management Adapter  
air circulation 17, 78, 94  
not installed message 135  
recovering 157  
blank screen 144  
bolt-down facility  
See U-bolt, installing  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1998  
185  
boot  
See startup  
chair adjustments 16  
changing  
boot block recovery 157  
broken cover latch 144  
broken door lock 144  
buffered extended data output (EDO) memory 54  
bypassing power-on password 171  
configuration settings 22  
hardware configuration 152  
jumper settings 172  
memory addresses 31  
PCI interrupt requests 29  
software configuration 152  
chassis bracket 104  
circulation, air 17  
cleaning the monitor 17  
clearances for air circulation 78  
clock  
real-time 114, 115  
CMOS configuration data  
comfort 16  
C
cable management arm  
cable-arm bracket 97  
cable-down facility  
See U-bolt, installing  
cable-management arm 100  
cables  
category 5 32, 91, 149  
connecting  
communication  
modem and fax requirements for the United  
Kingdom 41  
drive 62  
power 78, 80  
signal 78, 80  
crossover 149  
disconnecting  
requirements ix  
compatibility  
electromagnetic 32  
operating systems 67  
completing the installation 76  
configuration  
drive 60  
power 44, 46  
signal 44, 46  
drive power 57  
internal drive 57  
lengths 17  
removing 41, 44, 46  
safety ix  
two-drop drive power 57  
types 57  
adapter conflicts 152  
adapter locations 167  
changing hardware 152  
changing software 152  
Configuration/Setup program 21  
conflicts 30  
conflicts, memory address 152  
default settings 164  
device change 115  
device records 164, 167  
errors 21, 30  
cabling the server 78, 80  
cache  
control 29  
defining type 29  
internal level-2 size  
video 29  
Ethernet adapter 33  
Ethernet controller 32  
Ethernet failover 33  
IntraNetWare 35  
3
Cache Control 29  
cage nut 102  
card  
See adapters  
Category 5 cables 32, 91, 149  
caution  
OS/2 34  
Windows NT 34  
hardware change 125  
industry standard architecture (ISA) 20, 28, 29  
ISA expansion slot 167  
memory change 115  
memory-address conflicts 152  
option conflicts 152  
PCI expansion slot 167  
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) 20, 22,  
28, 30  
power-on self-test (POST) 20  
purpose 82  
recording information 82  
records  
battery handling ix, 159  
clearances for air circulation 78  
electrical safety 41  
general information 17  
handling static-sensitive devices 42  
laser compliance statement  
power supply 41  
x
CD-ROM drive  
eject button  
7
manual tray release  
7
defauts 164  
186 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
configuration (continued)  
updating server 82  
utility programs 20  
Configuration/Setup utility program  
administrator password 27  
configuring devices 23  
configuring I/O ports 23  
controlling access to 27  
defining system security 24  
exiting 22  
controller (continued)  
network 91  
SCSI, problems 135  
video 152  
controls  
cover  
7
installing 76, 79  
release lever  
8
removing 44, 47  
cover latch, broken 144  
cover plates 61  
limited menu 22  
power-on password 25  
setting date and time 24  
setting passwords 24, 27  
starting 21  
customer assistance  
error messages 110  
ordering publications xii  
telephone numbers xii  
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings 36  
configuring your server 20  
conflicts, configuration 30, 152  
connecting  
D
damaged system  
dropped 158  
spilled liquid 158  
cables ix  
drive cables 62  
DASD (direct access storage device)  
backplane 172, 173  
hot-swap enclosure 57, 173  
in startup sequence 82  
SCSI IDs 58, 59  
termination requirements 65  
data parity error, PCI  
Date and Time 24  
external drives 57  
external options 72  
internal drives 60  
power cables 78, 80  
signal cables 78, 80  
telephone line 78, 80  
U-bolt 74  
connector  
date, setting 24  
deactivated adapters 31  
default  
adapter 50  
device records 164  
Ethernet 91  
configuration values 164  
values for Configuration/Setup Utility 164  
deleting power-on password 171  
expansion slots 12  
input/output (I/O) port 90  
ISA-bus 49  
description  
device  
8
keyboard 12  
management C 12  
memory-module 54  
microprocessor 66  
monitor 12  
addresses 164  
configuration error 115  
drivers 32, 34  
external drives 57  
mouse 12  
input/output (I/O) port 90  
ISA adapter locations 169  
locations 163  
pointing, problems 146  
preinstalled 14  
parallel device 12, 165  
PCI-bus 49  
pointing device 12  
printer 12  
rear view of server 12  
SCSI 12, 58  
termination requirements 59  
serial device 12  
records 164  
SCSI 58  
SCSI, problems 135  
static-sensitive, handling 42  
Devices and I/O Ports  
parallel port assignment 23  
serial port assignment 23  
diagnosing server problems 107, 143  
diagnostic utility programs  
description, test programs 109  
considerations  
environmental 159  
microprocessor upgrade 66  
controller  
Ethernet 91, 136  
baud rates 32  
Ethernet, problems 149  
Index 187  
diagnostic utility programs (continued)  
diskette 143  
drive (continued)  
problems 143  
equipment 112  
purpose 56  
error messages 125  
main menu 111  
removing internal 56  
SCSI 58  
menu  
sizes 56  
Test Log 113  
tape 56  
messages, error 125  
navigating through tests 112  
starting 112  
types 56  
drivers  
device 31, 32, 34  
dropped server 158  
dual-inline memory module (DIMM)  
See also memory module (DIMM)  
description 54  
tools overview 109  
using LEDs 154  
disconnecting  
cables ix, 41  
drive cables 60  
installing or removing 54  
recording 167  
duplicate keys 162  
power cables 44, 46, 60  
signal cables 44, 46, 60  
telephone line 43  
disk drive, hard 56  
diskette drive  
E
EDO memory  
eject button  
7
See extended data output (EDO) memory  
EEPROM 23  
electrical  
preinstalled 14  
problems 143  
purpose 56  
outlets 17  
safety ix, 41  
disketteless operation 165  
diskettes  
electrical requirement 95  
electrically erasable programmable  
See EEPROM  
option 111  
display  
See monitor  
Endless Loop  
displayless operation 165  
disposing of batteries ix, 159  
DMA (direct memory access)  
assigning system resources 30  
conflicts 30  
door lock, broken 144  
drawer model  
See rack model  
drive  
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) 23  
environmental considerations 159  
Error Log 30  
error messages  
battery failure 115  
CD-ROM diagnostic (215) 129  
core system diagnostic (001) 126  
description 110  
device configuration 115  
diagnostic 110, 125  
bays 56  
cables 57  
CD-ROM 56  
connecting cables 62  
disconnecting cables 60  
diskette 56  
external 57  
fixed disk 56  
diskette drive diagnostic (206) 129  
Ethernet 136  
ethernet diagnostic (301) 131  
ethernet diagnostic (302) 131  
ethernet diagnostic (405) 131  
hard disk drive diagnostic (217) 130  
memory configuration 115  
memory size 55  
hard disk 56  
installing 56  
microprocessor diagnostic (089) 127, 131  
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) driver 138  
NDIS 4.0 driver 140  
NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver 136  
numeric 114  
parallel port diagnostic (014) 126  
PCI interface diagnostic (020) 127  
POST 114  
all bays 59  
internal 56, 60  
introduction 56  
location  
device records 163  
illustration 56  
position 59  
preinstalled 14  
188 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
error messages (continued)  
F
POST messages and beep codes 110  
power supply diagnostic (075) 127  
SCO UNIX driver 140  
failover for Ethernet  
configuration for 34  
description 33  
SCSI 135  
NIC adapter 33  
SCSI interface diagnostic (030) 127  
serial port diagnostic (011) 126  
software 111  
primary controller 33  
secondary controller 33  
Fast Ethernet 32  
fatigue 16  
software-generated 110  
status display diagnostic (180) 128  
system cache diagnostic (202) 129, 133  
system memory diagnostic (201) 128, 132  
system-management processor diagnostic  
(165) 128  
features  
administrator password 27  
internal 163, 164  
PCI, configuring 30  
records 163  
thermal system diagnostic (175) 128  
types 110  
fixed disk 56  
See also hard disk drive  
flickering monitor 144  
forgotten password  
administrator password 27  
power-on password 25  
formatting drives 38  
front view 14  
USB port interface diagnostic (015) 127  
video system diagnostic (005) 126  
ethernet  
4
Ethernet adapter  
redundant 33  
Ethernet controller  
baud rates 32  
changing the IRQ 29  
configuration 32  
connector (RJ-45) 91  
device driver 32  
G
general information  
before installing options 40  
installing drives 59  
general problems 144  
glare 16  
error messages 136  
failover feature 33  
NIC 33  
primary controller 33  
redundant adapter 33  
related publications xii  
SCO UNIX driver messages 140  
secondary controller 33  
troubleshooting 149  
Ethernet Link Status light 149, 150  
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light 149  
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light 149, 150  
Exit Setup 22  
glossary 177  
H
handling static-sensitive devices 42  
hard disk drive  
68-pin connector 89  
external device port 88  
internal device port 88  
low-level format 38  
preinstalled 14  
expansion bays 14  
expansion slots  
purpose 56  
adapter 49  
adapter locations 163, 169  
location 12  
hardfile  
See hard disk drive  
heat output of server 94, 95  
heat sink 67  
heavy-metal batteries 159  
help  
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) 23  
extended data output (EDO) memory 54  
extension cords 17  
external  
See customer assistance  
humidity of server environment 95  
device records 163, 167  
drives 57  
options, connecting 72  
SCSI connector 12  
SCSI devices, terminating 59  
views 12, 14  
I
I/O Ports 30  
configuring 23  
Index 189  
IBM 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Controller 32  
IBM service center  
See telephone numbers  
ID, SCSI 58  
identification numbers 162  
in-use lights  
J
jumper  
changing 172  
on DASD backplane 173  
CD-ROM  
diskette drive 7, 143  
8
K
keyboard  
angle of 16  
hard disk drive  
problems 144  
indicators, status  
industry standard architecture (ISA)  
See ISA (industry standard architecture)  
input/output port  
9
arm and wrist position 16  
connector 12, 87  
number lock 28  
port 87  
problems 146  
speed 28  
9
connector 90  
installation  
keyboardless operation 28, 165  
keys  
replacing 162  
serial number 162  
kits  
completing 76  
cover 76  
hardware 40  
preparation 40, 43  
installing  
sizes 164  
adapters 50  
battery 160  
cover 76  
L
device drivers 32  
external options 72  
internal drives 60  
preinstallation steps 59  
memory-module 54  
microprocessor 67, 68  
Option Diskettes 111  
SCSI drives 58  
LAN (local area network)  
configuring the Ethernet controller 32  
laser compliance statement  
latch, cover 144  
LED (light-emitting diode)  
See also lights  
x
DASD 1 error 168  
DIMM 1 error 168  
DIMM 2 error 168  
DIMM 3 error 168  
DIMM 4 error 168  
Ethernet Link Status 149, 150  
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps 149  
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity 149, 150  
Fan 1 error 168  
Fan 2 error 168  
Fan 3 error 168  
Fan 4 error 168  
identifying problems 153  
Microprocessor 1 error 168  
Microprocessor 2 error 168  
Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) error 168  
PCI 1 error 168  
U-bolt 74  
intermittent problems 145  
internal  
device records 163  
drives  
cables 57  
installing 60  
purpose 56  
removing 56  
options, installed 163  
preinstalled 14  
SCSI devices, terminating 59  
interrupt request (IRQ)  
assigning PCI 29, 30  
recording PCI 166  
recording serial 165  
viewing settings 22  
ISA (industry standard architecture)  
adapters, card support bracket 51  
configuring legacy adapters 30  
connector location 49  
ISA Legacy 30  
PCI 2 error 168  
power supply 153  
Power Supply 1 error 168  
Power Supply 2 error 168  
Service Processor error 168  
System-management interrupt 168  
Temperature error 168  
Voltage Regulator (integrated) error 168  
Voltage Regulator Module (VRM) error 168  
190 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
LED diagnostics 154  
lighting 16  
lights  
memory (continued)  
connector locations 54  
default settings 165, 167  
device records 164  
problems 146  
size errors 55  
CD eject  
CD-ROM in-use  
diskette drive  
7
8
7
Ethernet Link Status 10, 149, 150  
Ethernet Speed 10  
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps 149  
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity 10, 149, 150  
hard disk drive activity 10  
memory module (DIMM)  
buffered extended data output (EDO) 54  
device records 167  
installing 54  
purpose 54  
Hard Disk Drive In-Use  
9
removing 54  
hard disk drive status 10  
identifying problems 153  
size 54  
speed 54  
POST Complete  
9
system 54  
power modules 11  
type 54  
power supply 11, 153  
menus  
power-on  
9
Configuration/Setup 22  
diagnostic test programs 111  
SCSISelect Utility program 36  
messages  
Primary Microprocessor Activity 10  
Secondary Microprocessor Activity 10  
System Error 10  
lights not working 144  
liquid spilled on server 158  
locations  
battery failure 115  
CD-ROM diagnostic (215) 129  
core system diagnostic (001) 126  
device configuration error 115  
diagnostic 125  
adapter 49  
battery 160  
devices 163  
drive bays 56  
diskette drive diagnostic (206) 129  
error 125  
drives 163  
expansion slots 49  
features 12, 14  
ethernet diagnostic (301) 131  
ethernet diagnostic (302) 131  
ethernet diagnostic (405) 131  
hard disk drive diagnostic (217) 130  
invalid SCSI 135  
memory configuration error 115  
microprocessor diagnostic (089) 127, 131  
parallel port diagnostic (014) 126  
PCI interface diagnostic (020) 127  
POST 114  
power switch  
8
processor-upgrade socket 66  
server identification numbers 162  
server records 163, 164  
switches 170  
system memory 54  
termination 59  
lock, cover 76  
lock, door 144  
low-level format program  
backing up files 38  
overview 38  
power supply diagnostic (075) 127  
SCSI interface diagnostic (030) 127  
serial port diagnostic (011) 126  
status display diagnostic (180) 128  
system cache diagnostic (202) 129, 133  
system memory diagnostic (201) 128, 132  
system-management processor diagnostic  
(165) 128  
using 38  
when to use 38  
thermal system diagnostic (175) 128  
USB port interface diagnostic (015) 127  
video system diagnostic (005) 126  
microprocessor  
M
Main Menu  
Configuration/Setup 22  
diagnostic test programs 111  
mechanical loading, rack enclosure 94  
memory  
installing 67, 68  
installing secondary 66  
introduction 66  
address conflicts 152  
assigning system resources 30  
configuration error 115  
location 66  
microprocessor 66  
options 66  
Index 191  
microprocessor (continued)  
problems 145  
removing 68  
O
occasional problems 145  
office space, arranging 16  
operating system  
replacing 68  
speed switches, setting 70  
startup 145  
compatibility 67  
Option Diskettes  
copying 111  
Option ROM 29  
options  
upgrades 66  
model number 162  
module test  
description 112  
modules  
dual-inline memory module (DIMMs) 54  
monitor  
adapters 49  
addresses 164  
device records 164  
diskettes 111  
drives 56  
adjusting of 16  
cleaning 17  
external, connecting 72  
locations 163, 167  
memory-module 54  
microprocessor 66, 67, 68  
PCI, configuring 30  
problems 146  
configuring 23  
connector 12  
dusting of 17  
placement of 16  
port 86  
problems with 144  
mouse  
connector 12  
port 87  
problems 146  
multiprocessor support diskette 66  
SCSISelect Utility program 36  
U-bolt 74  
ordering  
publications xii  
replacement batteries 159  
replacement keys 162  
OS/2 Warp Server 4.0 Advanced SMP 66  
N
NDIS driver messages 140  
Netfinity Service Processor Manager  
problems 148  
P
parallel port  
configuration 165  
configuring 23  
connector 85  
network  
See also LAN (local area network)  
adapters  
See your network-adapter documentation  
auto-negotiation 32  
description 12  
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) 23  
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) 23  
location 12  
baud rates 32  
configuring the Ethernet controller 32  
connection problems 149  
device driver 32  
Ethernet connector 91  
Ethernet driver 136  
problems 147  
setting to bidirectional 23  
parameters  
default, configuration 164  
parity, data 29  
network adapter, starting from 28  
network interface card 33  
NIC adapter 33  
non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) 21  
notices  
part numbers  
keys 162  
publications xii  
serial 162  
password  
battery ix  
administrator 24, 27  
forgotten administrator 27  
general information 24, 25  
not set 25  
power-on 25, 171  
setting 27  
laser compliance statement  
safety information vi  
Novell NetWare  
x
messages 136  
number lock (NumLock) 28  
192 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
PCI (peripheral component interconnect) architecture  
assigning interrupt requests 29, 30  
bypassing defective adapter 21  
features and options 30  
features and options, configuring 30  
Interrupt Request 29  
slot location 49  
power-on password (continued)  
setting or changing 25, 26, 27  
power-on self-test (POST)  
battery failure 115  
beep codes 110, 122  
during configuration 20  
enhanced 28  
performance 33  
message table 114  
overview 110  
quick 28  
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) architecture  
See PCI (peripheral component interconnect)  
architecture  
table, message 114  
precautions  
phone numbers  
See telephone numbers  
pin-number assignment, I/O connector 90  
planning considerations 17  
planning workspace 16  
plates, cover 61  
electrical safety 41  
power supply 41  
preface xi  
preinstallation  
steps 59  
Plug and Play  
preinstalled devices 14  
preparing  
configuring system resources 30  
Ethernet controller 33  
pointing device  
external options for installation 72  
for installation 40, 43  
for setup 40  
See also mouse  
problems 146  
printer  
port  
problems 148  
keyboard 87  
mouse 87  
parallel 85  
SCSI 88  
serial 83  
universal serial bus 90  
video 86  
printers, SCSI 58  
privileged-access password  
See administrator password  
problems, solving  
configuration conflicts 152  
diagnostic tools 109  
error messages 110, 125  
Ethernet 150  
ports, input/output  
See connector  
keyboard 146  
parallel  
memory 146  
See parallel port  
serial  
microprocessor 145  
mouse 146  
See serial port  
network connection 149  
option 146  
POST  
See power-on self-test (POST)  
power cables  
parallel port 147  
POST 114  
connecting 78, 80  
disconnecting 44, 46, 60  
drive types 57  
printer 148  
serial bus, universal 147  
serial port 147  
power cord 174  
software 148  
lengths 17  
processor  
location 17  
See microprocessor  
processor-upgrade socket 66  
product  
power switch  
protector  
8
8
power-cord strain-relief bracket  
caution 17  
power-on password  
bypassing 171  
deleting 26  
advantages 33  
identification numbers 162  
internal and external options 163  
name 162  
Product Data 23  
programs  
features 25  
forgotten 171  
on boot 25  
advanced diagnostic 38  
low-level format 38  
Index 193  
programs (continued)  
navigating through diagnostic tests 112  
protecting  
replacing (continued)  
system board 27  
requirements for terminating SCSI devices 59  
resolving configuration conflicts 30  
retaining clip 54  
data 27  
the server 40  
publications  
ROM (read-only memory)  
address conflicts 152  
ordering xii  
part numbers xii  
related xii  
defining option caching 29  
S
R
safety requirements  
battery handling 159  
electrical ix, 41  
rack model  
connectors 12  
controls  
expansion bays 14  
7
general information 17, 40  
handling static-sensitive devices 42  
operating specifications 94  
preparing for installation 46, 94  
preparing the rack 98  
rack installation procedures  
installing in the rack enclosure 102  
preparing the rack 98  
laser compliance statement  
x
saving configuration settings 22  
scanners, SCSI 58  
SCO UNIX messages 140  
screens  
blank 144  
preparing the server 96  
removing from rack 104  
securing to the rack 81  
filter 16  
flicker 144  
SCSI (small computer system interface)  
16-bit devices 58  
68-pin connector 89  
8-bit devices 58  
status indicators  
rack, enclosure  
9
installing rack model 102  
preparing 98  
backplane 172  
preparing the server for installation 96  
removing rack model 104  
connector 12, 58  
connectors 88  
RAM (random-access memory)  
read-only memory (ROM)  
See ROM (read-only memory)  
rear view 12  
receive data 83  
records, device 163  
reducing glare 16  
3
description 58  
devices 14, 58  
Disk Utilities 37  
drive termination 59  
external device port 88  
integrated controller  
configuring 35  
redundant Ethernet 33  
refresh rate 144  
configuring for failover 34  
internal device port 88  
low-level disk format 38  
problems 135  
registered synchronous dynamic random access  
memory (SDRAM)  
3
related publications xii  
removing  
purpose 58  
SCSI IDs  
adapters 50  
battery 160  
device records 163  
viewing 37  
cover 44  
termination 59  
internal drive 56  
memory-module 54  
microprocessor 68  
power-on password 171  
server cables 41, 44, 46  
replacement batteries, ordering 159  
replacing  
SCSISelect Utility program  
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings 36  
low-level disk format 38  
menu description 36  
SCSI Disk Utilities 37  
starting 36  
using 35  
keys 162  
SDRAM  
3
microprocessor 68  
194 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
security options 74  
security procedures  
See also password  
administrator password 25  
defining system owner's name 28  
power-on password 25  
self-tests, internal 110  
serial number  
slot (continued)  
PCI-bus 49  
position, adapter 50  
SMP (symmetric multiprocessing)  
software  
error 111, 148  
problems 148  
solving problems  
4
keys 162  
server 162  
serial port  
configuration conflicts 152  
diagnostic tools 109  
error messages 125  
Ethernet 150  
address 165  
assignment 23  
bus, universal 147  
connector 83  
keyboard 146  
memory 146  
microprocessor 145  
mouse 146  
description 12  
location 12  
problems 147  
network connection 149  
option 146  
server  
overview 107  
cabling 78, 80  
parallel port 147  
printer 148  
front view  
7
identification numbers 162  
illustrated views  
SCSI controller 135  
SCSI device 135  
serial bus, universal 147  
serial port 147  
front  
7
rear 12  
installing cover 76  
manually powering off  
software 148  
testing 109  
8
operating system compatibility 67  
problems 111  
rear view 12  
troubleshooting charts 143  
sound, acoustical noise output 95  
speed  
records 163, 164, 167  
security features  
Ethernet controller 32  
keyboard 28  
passwords 24, 27  
updating configuration 82  
server damage 158  
standard Ethernet 32  
system memory 54  
spilled liquid on server 158  
Start Options  
enhanced POST 28  
keyboard speed 28  
keyboardless operation 28  
number lock 28  
startup sequence 28  
virus checking 28  
starting  
ServerGuide CDs  
service, warranty  
5
See telephone numbers  
setting  
passwords 24, 27  
setting up Netfinity 5000 server  
Setup program  
See Configuration/Setup utility program  
signal cables  
connecting 78, 80  
disconnecting 44, 46, 60  
size of server 95  
sizes  
2
Configuration/Setup program 21  
SCSISelect Utility program 36  
startup  
drive 28  
microprocessor 145  
password 25  
drive 56  
system memory 54  
slide bracket 96, 98, 99  
slide rail 97  
sequence 28  
static-sensitive devices, handling 42  
status indicators  
9
slot  
storage devices 14  
adapter 50  
expansion 49, 50  
ISA-bus 49  
super video graphics array (SVGA) controller 152  
supervisor password  
See administrator password  
Index 195  
surge protectors 17  
switches  
tower model (continued)  
controls  
7
See also jumper  
drive locations 59  
microprocessor speed 70, 170, 171  
system board 170  
expansion bays 14  
preparing for installation 44  
symmetric multiprocessing (SMP)  
system board  
4
status indicators  
transceiver 91  
transmit data 83  
troubleshooting  
9
battery failure 115  
LEDs 168  
System Information  
description 22  
CD-ROM drive problems 143  
charts 143  
PCI Routing 23  
Product Data 23  
Ethernet 149, 150  
Netfinity Advanced System Management service  
problems 148  
system memory  
4
system owner's name 28  
system resources 30  
overview 111  
turning off the system  
System Security menu  
location of power switch  
turning on the system  
location of power switch  
problems 145  
type  
8
8
administrator password 27  
power-on password 25  
system owner's name 28  
System Summary 22  
system-management processor  
4
cable 57  
drive 56  
system memory 54  
T
tape drive 56  
connector 85  
U
technical directory, publications  
See telephone numbers  
telephone line  
U-bolt, installing 74  
UltraSCSI  
enabling support 37  
unattended start mode 24  
setting 24  
connecting 78, 80  
disconnecting 43  
requirements for the United Kingdom ix, 41  
telephone numbers  
ordering batteries 159  
ordering publications xii  
temperature of server environment 95  
termination 59  
United Kingdom's telephone line requirements ix, 41  
universal serial bus (USB)  
connector 90  
description 90  
universal serial bus (USB) port 12  
unknown power-on password, removing  
using administrator password 25  
updating  
terms, glossary of 177  
Test Log 113  
testing  
configuration after installing options 82  
upgrades, microprocessor 66  
using  
description, diagnostic programs 109  
monitor 143  
server 111  
testing the server  
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu 22  
utility programs  
overview 109  
configuration 20  
starting 112  
tests, computer (diagnostic)  
overview 109  
Configuration/Setup 21  
diagnostic 111  
SCSISelect 35  
time, setting 24  
tools 40  
top cover, rack model  
installing 79  
V
venting of hot air 17  
video  
removing 47  
changing the IRQ 29  
configuring 23  
tower model  
connectors 12  
196 Netfinity 5000 Server Hardware Information and Procedures  
video (continued)  
connector location 13, 169  
default settings 165  
defining cache buffer 29  
enabling BIOS cache 29  
ROM address conflicts 152  
video port 86  
view  
front  
7
rear 12  
virus checking 28  
vital product data (VPD)  
voltage  
6
regulator feature 66  
voltage regulator module (VRM) 66  
VPD (vital product data)  
6
W
weight of server 95  
Windows NT Server 3.51 66  
work area, arranging 16  
wrap connector 112  
write policy 29  
write-back  
configuring 29  
write-through  
configuring 29  
Index 197  
IBM  
Part Number: 01K7717  
Printed in U.S.A.  
September 1998  
ð1K7717  

Iiyama Computer Monitor E1702S User Manual
LG Electronics L1940P User Manual
LG Electronics U 42PZ44 User Manual
Lucent Technologies 61227A User Manual
Manhattan Computer Products PCI SOUND CARD 175357 User Manual
Moffat RN8803G B User Manual
MSi G52 MA00542 User Manual
Philips 25PT5536 User Manual
Philips 28PW9515 User Manual
Philips 107C67 User Manual